Upload
john-jiang
View
223
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 125
Chapter 1Discovering Canada
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 225
2 Chapter 1
Introduction to the Chapter
Canada is a vast country with almost endless possibilities for adventure Whether you are living in or
visiting Canada there is a great deal that you can explore in this country
Canada has a wide variety of geographical regions Each has unique characteristics and is worth getting toknow Travelling into Western Canada you will see the vastness of the Canadian Prairies and the majesty
of the Rocky Mountains Travelling into Eastern Canada you will see the beauty of the St Lawrence
Lowlands and the Appalachian Mountains If you travel north you will discover the wonders of the
Arctic with its unique vegetation and wildlife
e culture of Canada is also diverse While Canada has two official languages French and English it
is multicultural e Aboriginal Peoples of Canada who have many different cultures and languages
have inhabited this land from time immemorial Immigrants from around the world have settled in
Canada for hundreds of years and brought with them a diversity of traditions and values As a result of
this mix of Aboriginal Peoples and immigrants Canada is well known for its cultural diversity
In Chapter 1 you will learn about the geography of Canada You will complete a quiz focused on a few
popular places in Canada and then you will read about two of the many spectacular places to visit
Canada Focus on Some Facts
Test your knowledge of the geography of Canada by responding to the questions below e map may
help you with the answers
1 Name the capital city of Canada
2 Name the capital city of the province in which you live
3 State the number of provinces and territories in Canada
Provinces _________ Territories _________
4 Name the province to the east of where you live and the province to the west What are the capital
cities of these two provinces Province to the east ________________________ Capital city ________________________
Province to the west ________________________ Capital city ________________________
6 Name the province in Canada where French is spoken by the majority of the population
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 325
Chapter 1
In 2007 the Canadian Broadcasting Corporation (CBC) a national broadcaster posted online the
results of a contest that it had created for Canadians In this contest Canadians could vote for their
favourite locations in Canada e contest was called ldquoe Seven Wonders of Canadardquo Canadians
suggested many locations in Canada as their favourites in fact according to the CBC (2007) over 1
million votes were cast in the contest
Name the province(s) or territory(ies) within Canada in which the following seven ldquofavourite spotsrdquo
as voted by Canadians are found To find this information you may consult with your classmates or
friends or use the Internet
Ontario
Queacutebec
B r i t i s
h
C o l u
m b i a
A l b
e r t a
Yukon
NunavutNorthwest
Territories
S a s
k a t c h
e w a
n
Manitoba
N e w f o u n d l a n d a n
d L a b
r a d o
r
New Brunswick
Nova Scotia
PrinceEdwardIsland
O
Toronto
QueacutebecFredericton
Halifax
St Joh
Charlottetown
Iqaluit
Yellowknife
Whitehorse
Victoria
Edmonton
Regina
Winnipeg
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 425
4 Chapter 1
Te Bay of Fundy
(67 670 votes)
Nahanni National Park(64 920 votes)
Northern Lights(61 417 votes)
Te Rockies
(55 630 votes)
Cabot rail
(44 073 votes)
Niagara Falls
(81 818 votes)
Te Sleeping Giant
(177 305 votes)
Which of these seven wonders is not found at aspecific location
Mark the other ldquowondersrdquo on your map of Canada
on page 3Source983139983138983139983139983137 (2007) Seven wonders of Canada Retrieved April 5 2009 from httpwwwcbccasevenwondersresultshtml
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 525
Chapter 1
Using Adjectives to Describe
Adjectives are words that are used to describe nouns (people places or things) Some adjectives
describe in a way that is neutral ey do not tell how writers feel about the things they are describing
Other adjectives tell a lot about how writers feel about the people places or things they are describing
e adjectives tell us whether the writers feel positive or negative
Adjectives Tat Are Neutral
Adjectives TatConvey aPositive Meaning
Adjectives TatConvey aNegative Meaning
greensofthardsmoothrough
excitinggreatfantasticfabulousspectacularpopular
terriblehorribleboringdulldisgusting
Exercise 1
1 ink about the adjectives listed above that convey positive meanings Rewrite the list ordering
the adjectives from the adjective that seems the most positive to you to the adjective that seems the
least positive to you
2 ink about the adjectives listed above that convey negative meanings Rewrite the list ordering
the adjectives from the adjective that seems the most neutral to you to the adjective that seems the
most negative to you
Exercise 2
Both of the sentences below describe Ottawa the capital city of Canada Underline the adjectives in th
sentences en basing your decision on the adjective determine whether the writer of each sentence i
neutral or expresses an opinion
1 Within Canada Ottawa is considered a large city
2 Ottawa the capital city of Canada is a lively city hosting a variety of festivals and celebrations
throughout the year
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 625
6 Chapter 1
Exercise 3
As a class brainstorm a list of 10 to 15 adjectives that could be used to describe someonersquos home en
decide whether each adjective is neutral or expresses a positive or negative opinion
Understanding Collocation In English there are words that fit with some words better than they fit with other words is is called
collocation
Certain adjectives collocate with certain nouns but do not collocate with other nouns For example
we can say that ldquoe man has blond hair rdquo but we would not say that ldquoe man has a blond car rdquo e
adjective blond is collocated with very few nouns We might say that ldquoe man has a tan car rdquo
Exercise
e adjectives in the chart below collocate with the word city Decide whether each adjective is neutral
or expresses an opinion en discuss your understanding with your classmates
Adjective Is NeutralExpresses aPositive Opinion
Expresses aNegative Opinion
large
enormous
quiet
magnificent
unique
beautiful
interesting
fun
small
sleepy
incredible
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 725
Chapter 1
Distinguishing Facts from Opinions in Reading
An important reading skill is to be able to distinguish facts from opinions Paying attention to the
adjectives that a writer uses to describe can help you determine whether a statement is a statement of
fact or opinion In addition to adjectives writers and speakers sometimes use special words or phrases
for emphasis in opinion or feeling statements ese words include the following
truly there can be no doubt that
honestly without a doubt
absolutely certainly
incredibly
Watch for these words and phrases in your reading
Exercise 1
Read the following statements and identify which statements express facts and which statements
express opinions Mark an ldquoFrdquo beside each fact and an ldquoOrdquo beside each opinion
1 e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world ____
2 e Bay of Fundy is a unique and fascinating place with its magnificent body of water and
incredible variety of wildlife ____
3 Nahanni National Park is included on UNESCOrsquos World Heritage List ____
4 Nahanni National Park is absolutely unspoiled by the impact of human development ____
5 e Cabot Trail runs through the Cape Breton Highlands ____
6 e Cabot Trail is named after an explorer named John Cabot ____7 When you travel through the Rockies you are at the top of the world ____
8 Banff is located in the Rockies ____
9 e Sleeping Giant is actually a natural rock peninsula that juts into Lake Superior ____
10 e northern lights are also called aurora borealis ____
11 e northern lights are truly spectacular ____
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 825
8 Chapter 1
Exercise 2
Choose one of the seven wonders of Canada Search online or interview a friend to learn more about
the place en in sentence form write four statements of fact about the wonder and two statements of
opinion about the wonder Share these statements with your classmates Ask your classmates to identify
which statements are facts and which are opinions
1 _____________________________________________________________________
2 ______________________________________________________________________
3 ______________________________________________________________________
4 ______________________________________________________________________
1 ______________________________________________________________________
2 ______________________________________________________________________
Keep the sentences that you have written in this exercise You will need your sentences for another
exercise later in the chapter
Reading
Reading 1mdashCarnaval de Queacutebec
Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic
1 What do you know about the province of Quebec
2 Have you ever attended a carnival Where was the carnival What activities were planned as part of
the carnival
3 In what type of winter activities have you participated
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 925
Chapter 1
Pre-reading Activity Scanning for Information
1 Scan the map of Canada on page 3 to find Quebec City
2 Now scan Reading 1 (below) to find the following facts You have four minutes to complete this
exercise
Hints for Scanning As you complete the scanning exercise below you should look for the information i
a systematic way Move your eyes through the material thinking about where the information is likely
to be located Also identify the proper nouns or keywords in each question and then scan the article
for these words If the question asks you for the name of a place look for capitalized nouns in the text
If the question asks you for a number scan for digits or numbers expressed in words
___________ e number of people who
attend the Carnaval de
Queacutebec annually
___________ e name of the large castlenear the Quebec Parliament
Buildings
___________ e size of the Ice Hotel
Quebec-Canada
___________ e number of guest rooms
and suites in the Ice Hotel
___________ e traditional activity
located at Place Loto-
Quebec
[1] In the middle of winter Quebec City comes to life during the Quebec Winter Carnival
(Carnaval de Quebec) With over two weeks of music parades and winter sports this is
Quebec Cityrsquos Mardi Gras In fact the Carnaval de Quebec is the worldrsquos largest winter
carnival attracting more than a million people e carnival owes some of its high spirit
to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of brandy vodka sherry and port)
although there are many events during the winter carnival that are organized for families
Carnaval de Queacutebec
Quebec City Quebec
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1025
10 Chapter 1
[2] Watching over the carnival is
Bonhomme the festivalrsquos mascot1
Bonhomme is a large snowman
he is newly constructed each
year According to local stories
Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice
Palace an enormous castle built ofsnow and ice that is located near
the Quebec government buildings
e carnival has many highlights
ese include the snow sculpture
competition at Place Loto-
Quebec tobogganing down icy
slides for adults and children the
dogsledding competition through
the streets of Vieux-Quebec2 and
the annual Snow Bath in whichstrong Quebecois strip down to
their bathing suits in front of
a lively crowd and dive into a
snowdrift e annual canoe race
in which participants race across
the icy St Lawrence River is even
more daring
[3] While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for
visitors therersquos no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada
a 30 000-square-foot hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow Located on the
shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an
exhibition space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly
constructed each year from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice Admittedly it is
not the most comfortable choice of hotel for everyone but at least make time to visit
and perhaps have something cool to drinkmdashin an ice glass of coursemdashat the Ice Bar
1 mascot a symbol of an event
2 Vieux-Quebec the old part of Quebec City
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1020ndash1021) New York Workman Publishing
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1125
Chapter 1
Vocabulary in Context
Most of the vocabulary that you will study as you work your way through this textbook appears on the
academic word list of frequently used words It is important for you to learn these words since they will
appear in various readings and lectures in academic studies
Choose the best meaning for each of the italicized words in the sentences below
1 e carnival owes some of its high spirit to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of
brandy vodka sherry and port) although there are many events during the winter carnival that are
organized for families (paragraph 1)
a) customary
b) new
c) magnificent
2 Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year (paragraph 2)
a) is made b) is connected
c) is designed
3 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of
snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)
a) ldquopersonrdquo who was born in
b) ldquopersonrdquo who works at
c) ldquopersonrdquo who lives at
4 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of
snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)a) popular
b) very large
c) medium-sized
5 e carnival has many highlights (paragraph 2)
a) best parts
b) longest parts
c) strangest parts
6 ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-Quebec tobogganing down icy slides
for adults and children the dogsledding competition through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and theannual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively
crowd and dive into a snowdrift (paragraph 2)
a) weekly
b) monthly
c) yearly
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1225
12 Chapter 1
7 While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot hotel
constructed each winter of ice and snow (paragraph 3)
a) suitable
b) fun
c) active
8 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition
space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)
a) surrounded by
b) situated on
c) south of
9 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition
space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each yearfrom 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)
a) gymnasium
b) library
c) display
Vocabulary Learning Strategy Using Word Cards
Intentionally focusing your attention on words that are used frequently in English can help you increase
the size of your vocabulary Using word cards is one way to focus your attention on vocabulary items in
English
1 Take a small card (approximately 5 cm x 4 cm) and write one of the new vocabulary words from
Reading 1 on one side of the card
2 On the other side of the card do the following
a) Draw a picture that represents the meaning of the word or write the meaning of the word in
English (If you have difficulty expressing the meaning of the word in English you may write
the translation of the word in another language)
b) Write a sentence in English that uses the new word in a meaningful context If you have
difficulty composing a sentence using the word check with an English learnersrsquo dictionary for a
good sample sentence
3 Create a card for each word that was new to you in the vocabulary exercise for Reading 1
4 Until you are comfortable using the words on your word cards review the cards every day changing
the order in which you review them Saying the words out loud as you review them may help you
remember them
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec
Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec
Length
General activities
1
2
3
Number of people who attend
Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec
Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
1
2
3
Activities
1
2
3
4
5
Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada
Size
Materials used in construction
Location
Number of guest rooms
Other rooms in the hotel
1
2
3
4
Advice
Comprehension Check
1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425
14 Chapter 1
2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion
Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo
Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions
a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________
b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-
Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition
through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois
strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________
c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more
daring __________
d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot
hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________
e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________
3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before
You Die For whom do you think the book was written
4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not
Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands
Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic
1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places
to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of
the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada
2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know
about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article
compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525
Chapter 1
The Queen Charlotte Islands
British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada
[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte
Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means
Islands of the People) are the homeland of the
Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British
Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands
mostly on Graham Island and about half of
these people are Haida e islands are also home
to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life
Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off
the coast of British Columbia this group of 150
islands has developed its own species of flora1 and
fauna2
From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live
on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen
Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million
nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos
population of peregrine falcons and salmon
[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000
years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred
objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European
diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council
of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the
second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island
is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is
beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed
in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages
which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the
park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours
offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the
Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from
the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for
meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625
16 Chapter 1
1 flora plants that grow in a place
2 fauna animals that live in a place
3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing
Vocabulary in Context
In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described
flora all the plants that grow in a place
fauna all the animals that live in a place
1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or
fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you
make the best guesses that you can
Flora Fauna
black bears
cedar
deer mice
hemlock
peregrine falcons
salmon
seabirds
spruce
2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about the
Queen Charlotte Islands
Indigenous name
Information about people on the Islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
1
2
3
Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people
on the islands
e Haida people before contact with
Europeans
e Haida people after contact with
Europeans
Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii
Haanas National Park Reserve
and Haida Heritage Site
Description of the park
Visiting the park
1
2
Comprehension Check
Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825
18 Chapter 1
Writing
Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences
Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple
compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will
learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and
editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences
The Simple Sentence
1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb
that work together to create a complete thought
Example e woman spoke
Subject Verb
2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object
so that the thought is complete
Examples e carnival has many highlights
Subject Verb Object
Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve
Subject Verb Object
and Haida Heritage Site
3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information
Examples No logging is allowed in the park
Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase
e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world
Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase
A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A
prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence
4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence
below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object
Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people
Subject Subject Verb Object
for more than 10 000 years
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences
Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences
1 At a traditional ceremony __________
2 During the annual film festival __________
3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________
4 On the prairie __________
5 We had a cool drink __________
6 Alongside the river __________
7 Enormous trees have survived __________
8 At the appropriate time __________
Exercise 2
Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI
beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing
1 In the most unique city in Canada __________
2 CBC held a contest __________
3 Many Canadians voted __________
4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________
5 Canadians chose many different places __________
6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________
7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________
8 Was a resident of the settlement __________
9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________
10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________
Exercise 3
Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to
make sure that they are complete
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025
20 Chapter 1
The Compound Sentence
A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been
joined by a coordinating conjunction
e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences
for nor or soand but yet
Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions
and additional information
Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island
but contrasting information
Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island
or alternative ideas
Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island
so cause and effect
Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast
Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent
clauses
e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences
About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
people are Haida
eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence
Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural
Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan
2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery
3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba
5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls
6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the
Cabot Trail
7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map
Exercise 2
Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this
chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence
to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225
22 Chapter 1
Writing to Communicate
Writing Task
Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words
1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could
be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place
2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor
place a community or an event in a particular place
Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it
is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never
been to the place that you are describing
Organization Choosing Information
As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need
to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about
the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are
unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first
paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs
1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec
Basic Information Location of the event
Length of the event
General activities at the event
Number of people who attend the event
Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
Activities
Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size
Materials used in the construction
Location
Other details
Ice Hotel
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325
Chapter 1
2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands
Basic Information Indigenous name
Information about people on the islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans
After contact with Europeans
Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park
Visiting the park
Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place
you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us
these lists as an outline for your composition
Descriptive Writing Creating an Image
When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e
organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important
to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place
seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place
In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and
the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One
of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive
feeling but also create a mood
In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns
high spirit
lively crowd welcoming environment
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425
24 Chapter 1
In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to
create a very different mood
distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands
incredibly rich diversity of biological life
masterful carvers
magnificent villages unique history
huge cedar spruce and hemlock
abandoned villages
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four
descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers
Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that
convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers
choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting
information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers
Revising and Editing
Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and
want to know Consider the following questions
bull Could your reader find the place on a map
bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader
bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place
Step 2Focus on your word choice
bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey
Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete
bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb
bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 225
2 Chapter 1
Introduction to the Chapter
Canada is a vast country with almost endless possibilities for adventure Whether you are living in or
visiting Canada there is a great deal that you can explore in this country
Canada has a wide variety of geographical regions Each has unique characteristics and is worth getting toknow Travelling into Western Canada you will see the vastness of the Canadian Prairies and the majesty
of the Rocky Mountains Travelling into Eastern Canada you will see the beauty of the St Lawrence
Lowlands and the Appalachian Mountains If you travel north you will discover the wonders of the
Arctic with its unique vegetation and wildlife
e culture of Canada is also diverse While Canada has two official languages French and English it
is multicultural e Aboriginal Peoples of Canada who have many different cultures and languages
have inhabited this land from time immemorial Immigrants from around the world have settled in
Canada for hundreds of years and brought with them a diversity of traditions and values As a result of
this mix of Aboriginal Peoples and immigrants Canada is well known for its cultural diversity
In Chapter 1 you will learn about the geography of Canada You will complete a quiz focused on a few
popular places in Canada and then you will read about two of the many spectacular places to visit
Canada Focus on Some Facts
Test your knowledge of the geography of Canada by responding to the questions below e map may
help you with the answers
1 Name the capital city of Canada
2 Name the capital city of the province in which you live
3 State the number of provinces and territories in Canada
Provinces _________ Territories _________
4 Name the province to the east of where you live and the province to the west What are the capital
cities of these two provinces Province to the east ________________________ Capital city ________________________
Province to the west ________________________ Capital city ________________________
6 Name the province in Canada where French is spoken by the majority of the population
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 325
Chapter 1
In 2007 the Canadian Broadcasting Corporation (CBC) a national broadcaster posted online the
results of a contest that it had created for Canadians In this contest Canadians could vote for their
favourite locations in Canada e contest was called ldquoe Seven Wonders of Canadardquo Canadians
suggested many locations in Canada as their favourites in fact according to the CBC (2007) over 1
million votes were cast in the contest
Name the province(s) or territory(ies) within Canada in which the following seven ldquofavourite spotsrdquo
as voted by Canadians are found To find this information you may consult with your classmates or
friends or use the Internet
Ontario
Queacutebec
B r i t i s
h
C o l u
m b i a
A l b
e r t a
Yukon
NunavutNorthwest
Territories
S a s
k a t c h
e w a
n
Manitoba
N e w f o u n d l a n d a n
d L a b
r a d o
r
New Brunswick
Nova Scotia
PrinceEdwardIsland
O
Toronto
QueacutebecFredericton
Halifax
St Joh
Charlottetown
Iqaluit
Yellowknife
Whitehorse
Victoria
Edmonton
Regina
Winnipeg
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 425
4 Chapter 1
Te Bay of Fundy
(67 670 votes)
Nahanni National Park(64 920 votes)
Northern Lights(61 417 votes)
Te Rockies
(55 630 votes)
Cabot rail
(44 073 votes)
Niagara Falls
(81 818 votes)
Te Sleeping Giant
(177 305 votes)
Which of these seven wonders is not found at aspecific location
Mark the other ldquowondersrdquo on your map of Canada
on page 3Source983139983138983139983139983137 (2007) Seven wonders of Canada Retrieved April 5 2009 from httpwwwcbccasevenwondersresultshtml
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 525
Chapter 1
Using Adjectives to Describe
Adjectives are words that are used to describe nouns (people places or things) Some adjectives
describe in a way that is neutral ey do not tell how writers feel about the things they are describing
Other adjectives tell a lot about how writers feel about the people places or things they are describing
e adjectives tell us whether the writers feel positive or negative
Adjectives Tat Are Neutral
Adjectives TatConvey aPositive Meaning
Adjectives TatConvey aNegative Meaning
greensofthardsmoothrough
excitinggreatfantasticfabulousspectacularpopular
terriblehorribleboringdulldisgusting
Exercise 1
1 ink about the adjectives listed above that convey positive meanings Rewrite the list ordering
the adjectives from the adjective that seems the most positive to you to the adjective that seems the
least positive to you
2 ink about the adjectives listed above that convey negative meanings Rewrite the list ordering
the adjectives from the adjective that seems the most neutral to you to the adjective that seems the
most negative to you
Exercise 2
Both of the sentences below describe Ottawa the capital city of Canada Underline the adjectives in th
sentences en basing your decision on the adjective determine whether the writer of each sentence i
neutral or expresses an opinion
1 Within Canada Ottawa is considered a large city
2 Ottawa the capital city of Canada is a lively city hosting a variety of festivals and celebrations
throughout the year
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 625
6 Chapter 1
Exercise 3
As a class brainstorm a list of 10 to 15 adjectives that could be used to describe someonersquos home en
decide whether each adjective is neutral or expresses a positive or negative opinion
Understanding Collocation In English there are words that fit with some words better than they fit with other words is is called
collocation
Certain adjectives collocate with certain nouns but do not collocate with other nouns For example
we can say that ldquoe man has blond hair rdquo but we would not say that ldquoe man has a blond car rdquo e
adjective blond is collocated with very few nouns We might say that ldquoe man has a tan car rdquo
Exercise
e adjectives in the chart below collocate with the word city Decide whether each adjective is neutral
or expresses an opinion en discuss your understanding with your classmates
Adjective Is NeutralExpresses aPositive Opinion
Expresses aNegative Opinion
large
enormous
quiet
magnificent
unique
beautiful
interesting
fun
small
sleepy
incredible
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 725
Chapter 1
Distinguishing Facts from Opinions in Reading
An important reading skill is to be able to distinguish facts from opinions Paying attention to the
adjectives that a writer uses to describe can help you determine whether a statement is a statement of
fact or opinion In addition to adjectives writers and speakers sometimes use special words or phrases
for emphasis in opinion or feeling statements ese words include the following
truly there can be no doubt that
honestly without a doubt
absolutely certainly
incredibly
Watch for these words and phrases in your reading
Exercise 1
Read the following statements and identify which statements express facts and which statements
express opinions Mark an ldquoFrdquo beside each fact and an ldquoOrdquo beside each opinion
1 e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world ____
2 e Bay of Fundy is a unique and fascinating place with its magnificent body of water and
incredible variety of wildlife ____
3 Nahanni National Park is included on UNESCOrsquos World Heritage List ____
4 Nahanni National Park is absolutely unspoiled by the impact of human development ____
5 e Cabot Trail runs through the Cape Breton Highlands ____
6 e Cabot Trail is named after an explorer named John Cabot ____7 When you travel through the Rockies you are at the top of the world ____
8 Banff is located in the Rockies ____
9 e Sleeping Giant is actually a natural rock peninsula that juts into Lake Superior ____
10 e northern lights are also called aurora borealis ____
11 e northern lights are truly spectacular ____
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 825
8 Chapter 1
Exercise 2
Choose one of the seven wonders of Canada Search online or interview a friend to learn more about
the place en in sentence form write four statements of fact about the wonder and two statements of
opinion about the wonder Share these statements with your classmates Ask your classmates to identify
which statements are facts and which are opinions
1 _____________________________________________________________________
2 ______________________________________________________________________
3 ______________________________________________________________________
4 ______________________________________________________________________
1 ______________________________________________________________________
2 ______________________________________________________________________
Keep the sentences that you have written in this exercise You will need your sentences for another
exercise later in the chapter
Reading
Reading 1mdashCarnaval de Queacutebec
Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic
1 What do you know about the province of Quebec
2 Have you ever attended a carnival Where was the carnival What activities were planned as part of
the carnival
3 In what type of winter activities have you participated
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 925
Chapter 1
Pre-reading Activity Scanning for Information
1 Scan the map of Canada on page 3 to find Quebec City
2 Now scan Reading 1 (below) to find the following facts You have four minutes to complete this
exercise
Hints for Scanning As you complete the scanning exercise below you should look for the information i
a systematic way Move your eyes through the material thinking about where the information is likely
to be located Also identify the proper nouns or keywords in each question and then scan the article
for these words If the question asks you for the name of a place look for capitalized nouns in the text
If the question asks you for a number scan for digits or numbers expressed in words
___________ e number of people who
attend the Carnaval de
Queacutebec annually
___________ e name of the large castlenear the Quebec Parliament
Buildings
___________ e size of the Ice Hotel
Quebec-Canada
___________ e number of guest rooms
and suites in the Ice Hotel
___________ e traditional activity
located at Place Loto-
Quebec
[1] In the middle of winter Quebec City comes to life during the Quebec Winter Carnival
(Carnaval de Quebec) With over two weeks of music parades and winter sports this is
Quebec Cityrsquos Mardi Gras In fact the Carnaval de Quebec is the worldrsquos largest winter
carnival attracting more than a million people e carnival owes some of its high spirit
to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of brandy vodka sherry and port)
although there are many events during the winter carnival that are organized for families
Carnaval de Queacutebec
Quebec City Quebec
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1025
10 Chapter 1
[2] Watching over the carnival is
Bonhomme the festivalrsquos mascot1
Bonhomme is a large snowman
he is newly constructed each
year According to local stories
Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice
Palace an enormous castle built ofsnow and ice that is located near
the Quebec government buildings
e carnival has many highlights
ese include the snow sculpture
competition at Place Loto-
Quebec tobogganing down icy
slides for adults and children the
dogsledding competition through
the streets of Vieux-Quebec2 and
the annual Snow Bath in whichstrong Quebecois strip down to
their bathing suits in front of
a lively crowd and dive into a
snowdrift e annual canoe race
in which participants race across
the icy St Lawrence River is even
more daring
[3] While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for
visitors therersquos no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada
a 30 000-square-foot hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow Located on the
shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an
exhibition space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly
constructed each year from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice Admittedly it is
not the most comfortable choice of hotel for everyone but at least make time to visit
and perhaps have something cool to drinkmdashin an ice glass of coursemdashat the Ice Bar
1 mascot a symbol of an event
2 Vieux-Quebec the old part of Quebec City
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1020ndash1021) New York Workman Publishing
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1125
Chapter 1
Vocabulary in Context
Most of the vocabulary that you will study as you work your way through this textbook appears on the
academic word list of frequently used words It is important for you to learn these words since they will
appear in various readings and lectures in academic studies
Choose the best meaning for each of the italicized words in the sentences below
1 e carnival owes some of its high spirit to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of
brandy vodka sherry and port) although there are many events during the winter carnival that are
organized for families (paragraph 1)
a) customary
b) new
c) magnificent
2 Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year (paragraph 2)
a) is made b) is connected
c) is designed
3 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of
snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)
a) ldquopersonrdquo who was born in
b) ldquopersonrdquo who works at
c) ldquopersonrdquo who lives at
4 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of
snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)a) popular
b) very large
c) medium-sized
5 e carnival has many highlights (paragraph 2)
a) best parts
b) longest parts
c) strangest parts
6 ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-Quebec tobogganing down icy slides
for adults and children the dogsledding competition through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and theannual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively
crowd and dive into a snowdrift (paragraph 2)
a) weekly
b) monthly
c) yearly
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1225
12 Chapter 1
7 While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot hotel
constructed each winter of ice and snow (paragraph 3)
a) suitable
b) fun
c) active
8 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition
space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)
a) surrounded by
b) situated on
c) south of
9 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition
space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each yearfrom 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)
a) gymnasium
b) library
c) display
Vocabulary Learning Strategy Using Word Cards
Intentionally focusing your attention on words that are used frequently in English can help you increase
the size of your vocabulary Using word cards is one way to focus your attention on vocabulary items in
English
1 Take a small card (approximately 5 cm x 4 cm) and write one of the new vocabulary words from
Reading 1 on one side of the card
2 On the other side of the card do the following
a) Draw a picture that represents the meaning of the word or write the meaning of the word in
English (If you have difficulty expressing the meaning of the word in English you may write
the translation of the word in another language)
b) Write a sentence in English that uses the new word in a meaningful context If you have
difficulty composing a sentence using the word check with an English learnersrsquo dictionary for a
good sample sentence
3 Create a card for each word that was new to you in the vocabulary exercise for Reading 1
4 Until you are comfortable using the words on your word cards review the cards every day changing
the order in which you review them Saying the words out loud as you review them may help you
remember them
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec
Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec
Length
General activities
1
2
3
Number of people who attend
Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec
Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
1
2
3
Activities
1
2
3
4
5
Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada
Size
Materials used in construction
Location
Number of guest rooms
Other rooms in the hotel
1
2
3
4
Advice
Comprehension Check
1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425
14 Chapter 1
2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion
Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo
Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions
a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________
b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-
Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition
through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois
strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________
c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more
daring __________
d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot
hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________
e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________
3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before
You Die For whom do you think the book was written
4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not
Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands
Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic
1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places
to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of
the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada
2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know
about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article
compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525
Chapter 1
The Queen Charlotte Islands
British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada
[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte
Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means
Islands of the People) are the homeland of the
Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British
Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands
mostly on Graham Island and about half of
these people are Haida e islands are also home
to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life
Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off
the coast of British Columbia this group of 150
islands has developed its own species of flora1 and
fauna2
From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live
on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen
Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million
nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos
population of peregrine falcons and salmon
[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000
years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred
objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European
diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council
of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the
second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island
is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is
beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed
in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages
which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the
park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours
offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the
Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from
the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for
meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625
16 Chapter 1
1 flora plants that grow in a place
2 fauna animals that live in a place
3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing
Vocabulary in Context
In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described
flora all the plants that grow in a place
fauna all the animals that live in a place
1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or
fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you
make the best guesses that you can
Flora Fauna
black bears
cedar
deer mice
hemlock
peregrine falcons
salmon
seabirds
spruce
2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about the
Queen Charlotte Islands
Indigenous name
Information about people on the Islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
1
2
3
Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people
on the islands
e Haida people before contact with
Europeans
e Haida people after contact with
Europeans
Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii
Haanas National Park Reserve
and Haida Heritage Site
Description of the park
Visiting the park
1
2
Comprehension Check
Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825
18 Chapter 1
Writing
Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences
Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple
compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will
learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and
editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences
The Simple Sentence
1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb
that work together to create a complete thought
Example e woman spoke
Subject Verb
2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object
so that the thought is complete
Examples e carnival has many highlights
Subject Verb Object
Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve
Subject Verb Object
and Haida Heritage Site
3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information
Examples No logging is allowed in the park
Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase
e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world
Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase
A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A
prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence
4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence
below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object
Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people
Subject Subject Verb Object
for more than 10 000 years
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences
Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences
1 At a traditional ceremony __________
2 During the annual film festival __________
3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________
4 On the prairie __________
5 We had a cool drink __________
6 Alongside the river __________
7 Enormous trees have survived __________
8 At the appropriate time __________
Exercise 2
Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI
beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing
1 In the most unique city in Canada __________
2 CBC held a contest __________
3 Many Canadians voted __________
4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________
5 Canadians chose many different places __________
6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________
7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________
8 Was a resident of the settlement __________
9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________
10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________
Exercise 3
Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to
make sure that they are complete
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025
20 Chapter 1
The Compound Sentence
A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been
joined by a coordinating conjunction
e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences
for nor or soand but yet
Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions
and additional information
Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island
but contrasting information
Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island
or alternative ideas
Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island
so cause and effect
Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast
Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent
clauses
e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences
About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
people are Haida
eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence
Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural
Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan
2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery
3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba
5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls
6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the
Cabot Trail
7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map
Exercise 2
Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this
chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence
to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225
22 Chapter 1
Writing to Communicate
Writing Task
Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words
1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could
be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place
2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor
place a community or an event in a particular place
Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it
is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never
been to the place that you are describing
Organization Choosing Information
As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need
to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about
the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are
unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first
paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs
1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec
Basic Information Location of the event
Length of the event
General activities at the event
Number of people who attend the event
Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
Activities
Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size
Materials used in the construction
Location
Other details
Ice Hotel
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325
Chapter 1
2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands
Basic Information Indigenous name
Information about people on the islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans
After contact with Europeans
Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park
Visiting the park
Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place
you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us
these lists as an outline for your composition
Descriptive Writing Creating an Image
When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e
organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important
to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place
seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place
In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and
the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One
of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive
feeling but also create a mood
In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns
high spirit
lively crowd welcoming environment
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425
24 Chapter 1
In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to
create a very different mood
distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands
incredibly rich diversity of biological life
masterful carvers
magnificent villages unique history
huge cedar spruce and hemlock
abandoned villages
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four
descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers
Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that
convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers
choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting
information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers
Revising and Editing
Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and
want to know Consider the following questions
bull Could your reader find the place on a map
bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader
bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place
Step 2Focus on your word choice
bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey
Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete
bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb
bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 325
Chapter 1
In 2007 the Canadian Broadcasting Corporation (CBC) a national broadcaster posted online the
results of a contest that it had created for Canadians In this contest Canadians could vote for their
favourite locations in Canada e contest was called ldquoe Seven Wonders of Canadardquo Canadians
suggested many locations in Canada as their favourites in fact according to the CBC (2007) over 1
million votes were cast in the contest
Name the province(s) or territory(ies) within Canada in which the following seven ldquofavourite spotsrdquo
as voted by Canadians are found To find this information you may consult with your classmates or
friends or use the Internet
Ontario
Queacutebec
B r i t i s
h
C o l u
m b i a
A l b
e r t a
Yukon
NunavutNorthwest
Territories
S a s
k a t c h
e w a
n
Manitoba
N e w f o u n d l a n d a n
d L a b
r a d o
r
New Brunswick
Nova Scotia
PrinceEdwardIsland
O
Toronto
QueacutebecFredericton
Halifax
St Joh
Charlottetown
Iqaluit
Yellowknife
Whitehorse
Victoria
Edmonton
Regina
Winnipeg
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 425
4 Chapter 1
Te Bay of Fundy
(67 670 votes)
Nahanni National Park(64 920 votes)
Northern Lights(61 417 votes)
Te Rockies
(55 630 votes)
Cabot rail
(44 073 votes)
Niagara Falls
(81 818 votes)
Te Sleeping Giant
(177 305 votes)
Which of these seven wonders is not found at aspecific location
Mark the other ldquowondersrdquo on your map of Canada
on page 3Source983139983138983139983139983137 (2007) Seven wonders of Canada Retrieved April 5 2009 from httpwwwcbccasevenwondersresultshtml
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 525
Chapter 1
Using Adjectives to Describe
Adjectives are words that are used to describe nouns (people places or things) Some adjectives
describe in a way that is neutral ey do not tell how writers feel about the things they are describing
Other adjectives tell a lot about how writers feel about the people places or things they are describing
e adjectives tell us whether the writers feel positive or negative
Adjectives Tat Are Neutral
Adjectives TatConvey aPositive Meaning
Adjectives TatConvey aNegative Meaning
greensofthardsmoothrough
excitinggreatfantasticfabulousspectacularpopular
terriblehorribleboringdulldisgusting
Exercise 1
1 ink about the adjectives listed above that convey positive meanings Rewrite the list ordering
the adjectives from the adjective that seems the most positive to you to the adjective that seems the
least positive to you
2 ink about the adjectives listed above that convey negative meanings Rewrite the list ordering
the adjectives from the adjective that seems the most neutral to you to the adjective that seems the
most negative to you
Exercise 2
Both of the sentences below describe Ottawa the capital city of Canada Underline the adjectives in th
sentences en basing your decision on the adjective determine whether the writer of each sentence i
neutral or expresses an opinion
1 Within Canada Ottawa is considered a large city
2 Ottawa the capital city of Canada is a lively city hosting a variety of festivals and celebrations
throughout the year
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 625
6 Chapter 1
Exercise 3
As a class brainstorm a list of 10 to 15 adjectives that could be used to describe someonersquos home en
decide whether each adjective is neutral or expresses a positive or negative opinion
Understanding Collocation In English there are words that fit with some words better than they fit with other words is is called
collocation
Certain adjectives collocate with certain nouns but do not collocate with other nouns For example
we can say that ldquoe man has blond hair rdquo but we would not say that ldquoe man has a blond car rdquo e
adjective blond is collocated with very few nouns We might say that ldquoe man has a tan car rdquo
Exercise
e adjectives in the chart below collocate with the word city Decide whether each adjective is neutral
or expresses an opinion en discuss your understanding with your classmates
Adjective Is NeutralExpresses aPositive Opinion
Expresses aNegative Opinion
large
enormous
quiet
magnificent
unique
beautiful
interesting
fun
small
sleepy
incredible
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 725
Chapter 1
Distinguishing Facts from Opinions in Reading
An important reading skill is to be able to distinguish facts from opinions Paying attention to the
adjectives that a writer uses to describe can help you determine whether a statement is a statement of
fact or opinion In addition to adjectives writers and speakers sometimes use special words or phrases
for emphasis in opinion or feeling statements ese words include the following
truly there can be no doubt that
honestly without a doubt
absolutely certainly
incredibly
Watch for these words and phrases in your reading
Exercise 1
Read the following statements and identify which statements express facts and which statements
express opinions Mark an ldquoFrdquo beside each fact and an ldquoOrdquo beside each opinion
1 e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world ____
2 e Bay of Fundy is a unique and fascinating place with its magnificent body of water and
incredible variety of wildlife ____
3 Nahanni National Park is included on UNESCOrsquos World Heritage List ____
4 Nahanni National Park is absolutely unspoiled by the impact of human development ____
5 e Cabot Trail runs through the Cape Breton Highlands ____
6 e Cabot Trail is named after an explorer named John Cabot ____7 When you travel through the Rockies you are at the top of the world ____
8 Banff is located in the Rockies ____
9 e Sleeping Giant is actually a natural rock peninsula that juts into Lake Superior ____
10 e northern lights are also called aurora borealis ____
11 e northern lights are truly spectacular ____
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 825
8 Chapter 1
Exercise 2
Choose one of the seven wonders of Canada Search online or interview a friend to learn more about
the place en in sentence form write four statements of fact about the wonder and two statements of
opinion about the wonder Share these statements with your classmates Ask your classmates to identify
which statements are facts and which are opinions
1 _____________________________________________________________________
2 ______________________________________________________________________
3 ______________________________________________________________________
4 ______________________________________________________________________
1 ______________________________________________________________________
2 ______________________________________________________________________
Keep the sentences that you have written in this exercise You will need your sentences for another
exercise later in the chapter
Reading
Reading 1mdashCarnaval de Queacutebec
Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic
1 What do you know about the province of Quebec
2 Have you ever attended a carnival Where was the carnival What activities were planned as part of
the carnival
3 In what type of winter activities have you participated
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 925
Chapter 1
Pre-reading Activity Scanning for Information
1 Scan the map of Canada on page 3 to find Quebec City
2 Now scan Reading 1 (below) to find the following facts You have four minutes to complete this
exercise
Hints for Scanning As you complete the scanning exercise below you should look for the information i
a systematic way Move your eyes through the material thinking about where the information is likely
to be located Also identify the proper nouns or keywords in each question and then scan the article
for these words If the question asks you for the name of a place look for capitalized nouns in the text
If the question asks you for a number scan for digits or numbers expressed in words
___________ e number of people who
attend the Carnaval de
Queacutebec annually
___________ e name of the large castlenear the Quebec Parliament
Buildings
___________ e size of the Ice Hotel
Quebec-Canada
___________ e number of guest rooms
and suites in the Ice Hotel
___________ e traditional activity
located at Place Loto-
Quebec
[1] In the middle of winter Quebec City comes to life during the Quebec Winter Carnival
(Carnaval de Quebec) With over two weeks of music parades and winter sports this is
Quebec Cityrsquos Mardi Gras In fact the Carnaval de Quebec is the worldrsquos largest winter
carnival attracting more than a million people e carnival owes some of its high spirit
to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of brandy vodka sherry and port)
although there are many events during the winter carnival that are organized for families
Carnaval de Queacutebec
Quebec City Quebec
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1025
10 Chapter 1
[2] Watching over the carnival is
Bonhomme the festivalrsquos mascot1
Bonhomme is a large snowman
he is newly constructed each
year According to local stories
Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice
Palace an enormous castle built ofsnow and ice that is located near
the Quebec government buildings
e carnival has many highlights
ese include the snow sculpture
competition at Place Loto-
Quebec tobogganing down icy
slides for adults and children the
dogsledding competition through
the streets of Vieux-Quebec2 and
the annual Snow Bath in whichstrong Quebecois strip down to
their bathing suits in front of
a lively crowd and dive into a
snowdrift e annual canoe race
in which participants race across
the icy St Lawrence River is even
more daring
[3] While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for
visitors therersquos no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada
a 30 000-square-foot hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow Located on the
shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an
exhibition space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly
constructed each year from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice Admittedly it is
not the most comfortable choice of hotel for everyone but at least make time to visit
and perhaps have something cool to drinkmdashin an ice glass of coursemdashat the Ice Bar
1 mascot a symbol of an event
2 Vieux-Quebec the old part of Quebec City
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1020ndash1021) New York Workman Publishing
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1125
Chapter 1
Vocabulary in Context
Most of the vocabulary that you will study as you work your way through this textbook appears on the
academic word list of frequently used words It is important for you to learn these words since they will
appear in various readings and lectures in academic studies
Choose the best meaning for each of the italicized words in the sentences below
1 e carnival owes some of its high spirit to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of
brandy vodka sherry and port) although there are many events during the winter carnival that are
organized for families (paragraph 1)
a) customary
b) new
c) magnificent
2 Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year (paragraph 2)
a) is made b) is connected
c) is designed
3 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of
snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)
a) ldquopersonrdquo who was born in
b) ldquopersonrdquo who works at
c) ldquopersonrdquo who lives at
4 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of
snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)a) popular
b) very large
c) medium-sized
5 e carnival has many highlights (paragraph 2)
a) best parts
b) longest parts
c) strangest parts
6 ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-Quebec tobogganing down icy slides
for adults and children the dogsledding competition through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and theannual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively
crowd and dive into a snowdrift (paragraph 2)
a) weekly
b) monthly
c) yearly
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1225
12 Chapter 1
7 While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot hotel
constructed each winter of ice and snow (paragraph 3)
a) suitable
b) fun
c) active
8 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition
space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)
a) surrounded by
b) situated on
c) south of
9 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition
space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each yearfrom 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)
a) gymnasium
b) library
c) display
Vocabulary Learning Strategy Using Word Cards
Intentionally focusing your attention on words that are used frequently in English can help you increase
the size of your vocabulary Using word cards is one way to focus your attention on vocabulary items in
English
1 Take a small card (approximately 5 cm x 4 cm) and write one of the new vocabulary words from
Reading 1 on one side of the card
2 On the other side of the card do the following
a) Draw a picture that represents the meaning of the word or write the meaning of the word in
English (If you have difficulty expressing the meaning of the word in English you may write
the translation of the word in another language)
b) Write a sentence in English that uses the new word in a meaningful context If you have
difficulty composing a sentence using the word check with an English learnersrsquo dictionary for a
good sample sentence
3 Create a card for each word that was new to you in the vocabulary exercise for Reading 1
4 Until you are comfortable using the words on your word cards review the cards every day changing
the order in which you review them Saying the words out loud as you review them may help you
remember them
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec
Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec
Length
General activities
1
2
3
Number of people who attend
Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec
Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
1
2
3
Activities
1
2
3
4
5
Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada
Size
Materials used in construction
Location
Number of guest rooms
Other rooms in the hotel
1
2
3
4
Advice
Comprehension Check
1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425
14 Chapter 1
2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion
Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo
Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions
a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________
b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-
Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition
through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois
strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________
c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more
daring __________
d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot
hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________
e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________
3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before
You Die For whom do you think the book was written
4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not
Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands
Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic
1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places
to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of
the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada
2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know
about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article
compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525
Chapter 1
The Queen Charlotte Islands
British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada
[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte
Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means
Islands of the People) are the homeland of the
Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British
Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands
mostly on Graham Island and about half of
these people are Haida e islands are also home
to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life
Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off
the coast of British Columbia this group of 150
islands has developed its own species of flora1 and
fauna2
From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live
on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen
Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million
nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos
population of peregrine falcons and salmon
[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000
years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred
objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European
diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council
of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the
second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island
is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is
beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed
in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages
which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the
park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours
offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the
Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from
the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for
meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625
16 Chapter 1
1 flora plants that grow in a place
2 fauna animals that live in a place
3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing
Vocabulary in Context
In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described
flora all the plants that grow in a place
fauna all the animals that live in a place
1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or
fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you
make the best guesses that you can
Flora Fauna
black bears
cedar
deer mice
hemlock
peregrine falcons
salmon
seabirds
spruce
2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about the
Queen Charlotte Islands
Indigenous name
Information about people on the Islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
1
2
3
Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people
on the islands
e Haida people before contact with
Europeans
e Haida people after contact with
Europeans
Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii
Haanas National Park Reserve
and Haida Heritage Site
Description of the park
Visiting the park
1
2
Comprehension Check
Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825
18 Chapter 1
Writing
Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences
Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple
compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will
learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and
editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences
The Simple Sentence
1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb
that work together to create a complete thought
Example e woman spoke
Subject Verb
2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object
so that the thought is complete
Examples e carnival has many highlights
Subject Verb Object
Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve
Subject Verb Object
and Haida Heritage Site
3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information
Examples No logging is allowed in the park
Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase
e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world
Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase
A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A
prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence
4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence
below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object
Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people
Subject Subject Verb Object
for more than 10 000 years
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences
Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences
1 At a traditional ceremony __________
2 During the annual film festival __________
3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________
4 On the prairie __________
5 We had a cool drink __________
6 Alongside the river __________
7 Enormous trees have survived __________
8 At the appropriate time __________
Exercise 2
Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI
beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing
1 In the most unique city in Canada __________
2 CBC held a contest __________
3 Many Canadians voted __________
4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________
5 Canadians chose many different places __________
6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________
7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________
8 Was a resident of the settlement __________
9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________
10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________
Exercise 3
Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to
make sure that they are complete
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025
20 Chapter 1
The Compound Sentence
A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been
joined by a coordinating conjunction
e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences
for nor or soand but yet
Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions
and additional information
Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island
but contrasting information
Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island
or alternative ideas
Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island
so cause and effect
Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast
Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent
clauses
e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences
About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
people are Haida
eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence
Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural
Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan
2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery
3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba
5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls
6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the
Cabot Trail
7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map
Exercise 2
Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this
chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence
to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225
22 Chapter 1
Writing to Communicate
Writing Task
Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words
1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could
be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place
2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor
place a community or an event in a particular place
Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it
is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never
been to the place that you are describing
Organization Choosing Information
As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need
to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about
the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are
unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first
paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs
1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec
Basic Information Location of the event
Length of the event
General activities at the event
Number of people who attend the event
Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
Activities
Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size
Materials used in the construction
Location
Other details
Ice Hotel
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325
Chapter 1
2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands
Basic Information Indigenous name
Information about people on the islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans
After contact with Europeans
Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park
Visiting the park
Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place
you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us
these lists as an outline for your composition
Descriptive Writing Creating an Image
When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e
organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important
to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place
seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place
In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and
the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One
of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive
feeling but also create a mood
In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns
high spirit
lively crowd welcoming environment
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425
24 Chapter 1
In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to
create a very different mood
distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands
incredibly rich diversity of biological life
masterful carvers
magnificent villages unique history
huge cedar spruce and hemlock
abandoned villages
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four
descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers
Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that
convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers
choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting
information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers
Revising and Editing
Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and
want to know Consider the following questions
bull Could your reader find the place on a map
bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader
bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place
Step 2Focus on your word choice
bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey
Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete
bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb
bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 425
4 Chapter 1
Te Bay of Fundy
(67 670 votes)
Nahanni National Park(64 920 votes)
Northern Lights(61 417 votes)
Te Rockies
(55 630 votes)
Cabot rail
(44 073 votes)
Niagara Falls
(81 818 votes)
Te Sleeping Giant
(177 305 votes)
Which of these seven wonders is not found at aspecific location
Mark the other ldquowondersrdquo on your map of Canada
on page 3Source983139983138983139983139983137 (2007) Seven wonders of Canada Retrieved April 5 2009 from httpwwwcbccasevenwondersresultshtml
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 525
Chapter 1
Using Adjectives to Describe
Adjectives are words that are used to describe nouns (people places or things) Some adjectives
describe in a way that is neutral ey do not tell how writers feel about the things they are describing
Other adjectives tell a lot about how writers feel about the people places or things they are describing
e adjectives tell us whether the writers feel positive or negative
Adjectives Tat Are Neutral
Adjectives TatConvey aPositive Meaning
Adjectives TatConvey aNegative Meaning
greensofthardsmoothrough
excitinggreatfantasticfabulousspectacularpopular
terriblehorribleboringdulldisgusting
Exercise 1
1 ink about the adjectives listed above that convey positive meanings Rewrite the list ordering
the adjectives from the adjective that seems the most positive to you to the adjective that seems the
least positive to you
2 ink about the adjectives listed above that convey negative meanings Rewrite the list ordering
the adjectives from the adjective that seems the most neutral to you to the adjective that seems the
most negative to you
Exercise 2
Both of the sentences below describe Ottawa the capital city of Canada Underline the adjectives in th
sentences en basing your decision on the adjective determine whether the writer of each sentence i
neutral or expresses an opinion
1 Within Canada Ottawa is considered a large city
2 Ottawa the capital city of Canada is a lively city hosting a variety of festivals and celebrations
throughout the year
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 625
6 Chapter 1
Exercise 3
As a class brainstorm a list of 10 to 15 adjectives that could be used to describe someonersquos home en
decide whether each adjective is neutral or expresses a positive or negative opinion
Understanding Collocation In English there are words that fit with some words better than they fit with other words is is called
collocation
Certain adjectives collocate with certain nouns but do not collocate with other nouns For example
we can say that ldquoe man has blond hair rdquo but we would not say that ldquoe man has a blond car rdquo e
adjective blond is collocated with very few nouns We might say that ldquoe man has a tan car rdquo
Exercise
e adjectives in the chart below collocate with the word city Decide whether each adjective is neutral
or expresses an opinion en discuss your understanding with your classmates
Adjective Is NeutralExpresses aPositive Opinion
Expresses aNegative Opinion
large
enormous
quiet
magnificent
unique
beautiful
interesting
fun
small
sleepy
incredible
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 725
Chapter 1
Distinguishing Facts from Opinions in Reading
An important reading skill is to be able to distinguish facts from opinions Paying attention to the
adjectives that a writer uses to describe can help you determine whether a statement is a statement of
fact or opinion In addition to adjectives writers and speakers sometimes use special words or phrases
for emphasis in opinion or feeling statements ese words include the following
truly there can be no doubt that
honestly without a doubt
absolutely certainly
incredibly
Watch for these words and phrases in your reading
Exercise 1
Read the following statements and identify which statements express facts and which statements
express opinions Mark an ldquoFrdquo beside each fact and an ldquoOrdquo beside each opinion
1 e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world ____
2 e Bay of Fundy is a unique and fascinating place with its magnificent body of water and
incredible variety of wildlife ____
3 Nahanni National Park is included on UNESCOrsquos World Heritage List ____
4 Nahanni National Park is absolutely unspoiled by the impact of human development ____
5 e Cabot Trail runs through the Cape Breton Highlands ____
6 e Cabot Trail is named after an explorer named John Cabot ____7 When you travel through the Rockies you are at the top of the world ____
8 Banff is located in the Rockies ____
9 e Sleeping Giant is actually a natural rock peninsula that juts into Lake Superior ____
10 e northern lights are also called aurora borealis ____
11 e northern lights are truly spectacular ____
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 825
8 Chapter 1
Exercise 2
Choose one of the seven wonders of Canada Search online or interview a friend to learn more about
the place en in sentence form write four statements of fact about the wonder and two statements of
opinion about the wonder Share these statements with your classmates Ask your classmates to identify
which statements are facts and which are opinions
1 _____________________________________________________________________
2 ______________________________________________________________________
3 ______________________________________________________________________
4 ______________________________________________________________________
1 ______________________________________________________________________
2 ______________________________________________________________________
Keep the sentences that you have written in this exercise You will need your sentences for another
exercise later in the chapter
Reading
Reading 1mdashCarnaval de Queacutebec
Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic
1 What do you know about the province of Quebec
2 Have you ever attended a carnival Where was the carnival What activities were planned as part of
the carnival
3 In what type of winter activities have you participated
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 925
Chapter 1
Pre-reading Activity Scanning for Information
1 Scan the map of Canada on page 3 to find Quebec City
2 Now scan Reading 1 (below) to find the following facts You have four minutes to complete this
exercise
Hints for Scanning As you complete the scanning exercise below you should look for the information i
a systematic way Move your eyes through the material thinking about where the information is likely
to be located Also identify the proper nouns or keywords in each question and then scan the article
for these words If the question asks you for the name of a place look for capitalized nouns in the text
If the question asks you for a number scan for digits or numbers expressed in words
___________ e number of people who
attend the Carnaval de
Queacutebec annually
___________ e name of the large castlenear the Quebec Parliament
Buildings
___________ e size of the Ice Hotel
Quebec-Canada
___________ e number of guest rooms
and suites in the Ice Hotel
___________ e traditional activity
located at Place Loto-
Quebec
[1] In the middle of winter Quebec City comes to life during the Quebec Winter Carnival
(Carnaval de Quebec) With over two weeks of music parades and winter sports this is
Quebec Cityrsquos Mardi Gras In fact the Carnaval de Quebec is the worldrsquos largest winter
carnival attracting more than a million people e carnival owes some of its high spirit
to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of brandy vodka sherry and port)
although there are many events during the winter carnival that are organized for families
Carnaval de Queacutebec
Quebec City Quebec
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1025
10 Chapter 1
[2] Watching over the carnival is
Bonhomme the festivalrsquos mascot1
Bonhomme is a large snowman
he is newly constructed each
year According to local stories
Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice
Palace an enormous castle built ofsnow and ice that is located near
the Quebec government buildings
e carnival has many highlights
ese include the snow sculpture
competition at Place Loto-
Quebec tobogganing down icy
slides for adults and children the
dogsledding competition through
the streets of Vieux-Quebec2 and
the annual Snow Bath in whichstrong Quebecois strip down to
their bathing suits in front of
a lively crowd and dive into a
snowdrift e annual canoe race
in which participants race across
the icy St Lawrence River is even
more daring
[3] While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for
visitors therersquos no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada
a 30 000-square-foot hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow Located on the
shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an
exhibition space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly
constructed each year from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice Admittedly it is
not the most comfortable choice of hotel for everyone but at least make time to visit
and perhaps have something cool to drinkmdashin an ice glass of coursemdashat the Ice Bar
1 mascot a symbol of an event
2 Vieux-Quebec the old part of Quebec City
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1020ndash1021) New York Workman Publishing
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1125
Chapter 1
Vocabulary in Context
Most of the vocabulary that you will study as you work your way through this textbook appears on the
academic word list of frequently used words It is important for you to learn these words since they will
appear in various readings and lectures in academic studies
Choose the best meaning for each of the italicized words in the sentences below
1 e carnival owes some of its high spirit to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of
brandy vodka sherry and port) although there are many events during the winter carnival that are
organized for families (paragraph 1)
a) customary
b) new
c) magnificent
2 Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year (paragraph 2)
a) is made b) is connected
c) is designed
3 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of
snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)
a) ldquopersonrdquo who was born in
b) ldquopersonrdquo who works at
c) ldquopersonrdquo who lives at
4 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of
snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)a) popular
b) very large
c) medium-sized
5 e carnival has many highlights (paragraph 2)
a) best parts
b) longest parts
c) strangest parts
6 ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-Quebec tobogganing down icy slides
for adults and children the dogsledding competition through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and theannual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively
crowd and dive into a snowdrift (paragraph 2)
a) weekly
b) monthly
c) yearly
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1225
12 Chapter 1
7 While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot hotel
constructed each winter of ice and snow (paragraph 3)
a) suitable
b) fun
c) active
8 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition
space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)
a) surrounded by
b) situated on
c) south of
9 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition
space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each yearfrom 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)
a) gymnasium
b) library
c) display
Vocabulary Learning Strategy Using Word Cards
Intentionally focusing your attention on words that are used frequently in English can help you increase
the size of your vocabulary Using word cards is one way to focus your attention on vocabulary items in
English
1 Take a small card (approximately 5 cm x 4 cm) and write one of the new vocabulary words from
Reading 1 on one side of the card
2 On the other side of the card do the following
a) Draw a picture that represents the meaning of the word or write the meaning of the word in
English (If you have difficulty expressing the meaning of the word in English you may write
the translation of the word in another language)
b) Write a sentence in English that uses the new word in a meaningful context If you have
difficulty composing a sentence using the word check with an English learnersrsquo dictionary for a
good sample sentence
3 Create a card for each word that was new to you in the vocabulary exercise for Reading 1
4 Until you are comfortable using the words on your word cards review the cards every day changing
the order in which you review them Saying the words out loud as you review them may help you
remember them
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec
Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec
Length
General activities
1
2
3
Number of people who attend
Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec
Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
1
2
3
Activities
1
2
3
4
5
Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada
Size
Materials used in construction
Location
Number of guest rooms
Other rooms in the hotel
1
2
3
4
Advice
Comprehension Check
1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425
14 Chapter 1
2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion
Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo
Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions
a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________
b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-
Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition
through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois
strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________
c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more
daring __________
d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot
hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________
e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________
3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before
You Die For whom do you think the book was written
4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not
Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands
Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic
1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places
to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of
the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada
2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know
about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article
compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525
Chapter 1
The Queen Charlotte Islands
British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada
[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte
Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means
Islands of the People) are the homeland of the
Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British
Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands
mostly on Graham Island and about half of
these people are Haida e islands are also home
to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life
Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off
the coast of British Columbia this group of 150
islands has developed its own species of flora1 and
fauna2
From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live
on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen
Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million
nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos
population of peregrine falcons and salmon
[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000
years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred
objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European
diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council
of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the
second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island
is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is
beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed
in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages
which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the
park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours
offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the
Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from
the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for
meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625
16 Chapter 1
1 flora plants that grow in a place
2 fauna animals that live in a place
3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing
Vocabulary in Context
In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described
flora all the plants that grow in a place
fauna all the animals that live in a place
1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or
fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you
make the best guesses that you can
Flora Fauna
black bears
cedar
deer mice
hemlock
peregrine falcons
salmon
seabirds
spruce
2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about the
Queen Charlotte Islands
Indigenous name
Information about people on the Islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
1
2
3
Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people
on the islands
e Haida people before contact with
Europeans
e Haida people after contact with
Europeans
Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii
Haanas National Park Reserve
and Haida Heritage Site
Description of the park
Visiting the park
1
2
Comprehension Check
Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825
18 Chapter 1
Writing
Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences
Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple
compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will
learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and
editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences
The Simple Sentence
1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb
that work together to create a complete thought
Example e woman spoke
Subject Verb
2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object
so that the thought is complete
Examples e carnival has many highlights
Subject Verb Object
Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve
Subject Verb Object
and Haida Heritage Site
3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information
Examples No logging is allowed in the park
Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase
e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world
Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase
A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A
prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence
4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence
below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object
Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people
Subject Subject Verb Object
for more than 10 000 years
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences
Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences
1 At a traditional ceremony __________
2 During the annual film festival __________
3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________
4 On the prairie __________
5 We had a cool drink __________
6 Alongside the river __________
7 Enormous trees have survived __________
8 At the appropriate time __________
Exercise 2
Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI
beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing
1 In the most unique city in Canada __________
2 CBC held a contest __________
3 Many Canadians voted __________
4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________
5 Canadians chose many different places __________
6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________
7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________
8 Was a resident of the settlement __________
9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________
10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________
Exercise 3
Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to
make sure that they are complete
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025
20 Chapter 1
The Compound Sentence
A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been
joined by a coordinating conjunction
e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences
for nor or soand but yet
Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions
and additional information
Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island
but contrasting information
Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island
or alternative ideas
Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island
so cause and effect
Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast
Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent
clauses
e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences
About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
people are Haida
eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence
Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural
Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan
2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery
3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba
5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls
6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the
Cabot Trail
7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map
Exercise 2
Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this
chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence
to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225
22 Chapter 1
Writing to Communicate
Writing Task
Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words
1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could
be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place
2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor
place a community or an event in a particular place
Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it
is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never
been to the place that you are describing
Organization Choosing Information
As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need
to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about
the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are
unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first
paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs
1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec
Basic Information Location of the event
Length of the event
General activities at the event
Number of people who attend the event
Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
Activities
Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size
Materials used in the construction
Location
Other details
Ice Hotel
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325
Chapter 1
2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands
Basic Information Indigenous name
Information about people on the islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans
After contact with Europeans
Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park
Visiting the park
Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place
you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us
these lists as an outline for your composition
Descriptive Writing Creating an Image
When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e
organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important
to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place
seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place
In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and
the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One
of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive
feeling but also create a mood
In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns
high spirit
lively crowd welcoming environment
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425
24 Chapter 1
In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to
create a very different mood
distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands
incredibly rich diversity of biological life
masterful carvers
magnificent villages unique history
huge cedar spruce and hemlock
abandoned villages
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four
descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers
Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that
convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers
choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting
information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers
Revising and Editing
Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and
want to know Consider the following questions
bull Could your reader find the place on a map
bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader
bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place
Step 2Focus on your word choice
bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey
Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete
bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb
bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 525
Chapter 1
Using Adjectives to Describe
Adjectives are words that are used to describe nouns (people places or things) Some adjectives
describe in a way that is neutral ey do not tell how writers feel about the things they are describing
Other adjectives tell a lot about how writers feel about the people places or things they are describing
e adjectives tell us whether the writers feel positive or negative
Adjectives Tat Are Neutral
Adjectives TatConvey aPositive Meaning
Adjectives TatConvey aNegative Meaning
greensofthardsmoothrough
excitinggreatfantasticfabulousspectacularpopular
terriblehorribleboringdulldisgusting
Exercise 1
1 ink about the adjectives listed above that convey positive meanings Rewrite the list ordering
the adjectives from the adjective that seems the most positive to you to the adjective that seems the
least positive to you
2 ink about the adjectives listed above that convey negative meanings Rewrite the list ordering
the adjectives from the adjective that seems the most neutral to you to the adjective that seems the
most negative to you
Exercise 2
Both of the sentences below describe Ottawa the capital city of Canada Underline the adjectives in th
sentences en basing your decision on the adjective determine whether the writer of each sentence i
neutral or expresses an opinion
1 Within Canada Ottawa is considered a large city
2 Ottawa the capital city of Canada is a lively city hosting a variety of festivals and celebrations
throughout the year
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 625
6 Chapter 1
Exercise 3
As a class brainstorm a list of 10 to 15 adjectives that could be used to describe someonersquos home en
decide whether each adjective is neutral or expresses a positive or negative opinion
Understanding Collocation In English there are words that fit with some words better than they fit with other words is is called
collocation
Certain adjectives collocate with certain nouns but do not collocate with other nouns For example
we can say that ldquoe man has blond hair rdquo but we would not say that ldquoe man has a blond car rdquo e
adjective blond is collocated with very few nouns We might say that ldquoe man has a tan car rdquo
Exercise
e adjectives in the chart below collocate with the word city Decide whether each adjective is neutral
or expresses an opinion en discuss your understanding with your classmates
Adjective Is NeutralExpresses aPositive Opinion
Expresses aNegative Opinion
large
enormous
quiet
magnificent
unique
beautiful
interesting
fun
small
sleepy
incredible
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 725
Chapter 1
Distinguishing Facts from Opinions in Reading
An important reading skill is to be able to distinguish facts from opinions Paying attention to the
adjectives that a writer uses to describe can help you determine whether a statement is a statement of
fact or opinion In addition to adjectives writers and speakers sometimes use special words or phrases
for emphasis in opinion or feeling statements ese words include the following
truly there can be no doubt that
honestly without a doubt
absolutely certainly
incredibly
Watch for these words and phrases in your reading
Exercise 1
Read the following statements and identify which statements express facts and which statements
express opinions Mark an ldquoFrdquo beside each fact and an ldquoOrdquo beside each opinion
1 e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world ____
2 e Bay of Fundy is a unique and fascinating place with its magnificent body of water and
incredible variety of wildlife ____
3 Nahanni National Park is included on UNESCOrsquos World Heritage List ____
4 Nahanni National Park is absolutely unspoiled by the impact of human development ____
5 e Cabot Trail runs through the Cape Breton Highlands ____
6 e Cabot Trail is named after an explorer named John Cabot ____7 When you travel through the Rockies you are at the top of the world ____
8 Banff is located in the Rockies ____
9 e Sleeping Giant is actually a natural rock peninsula that juts into Lake Superior ____
10 e northern lights are also called aurora borealis ____
11 e northern lights are truly spectacular ____
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 825
8 Chapter 1
Exercise 2
Choose one of the seven wonders of Canada Search online or interview a friend to learn more about
the place en in sentence form write four statements of fact about the wonder and two statements of
opinion about the wonder Share these statements with your classmates Ask your classmates to identify
which statements are facts and which are opinions
1 _____________________________________________________________________
2 ______________________________________________________________________
3 ______________________________________________________________________
4 ______________________________________________________________________
1 ______________________________________________________________________
2 ______________________________________________________________________
Keep the sentences that you have written in this exercise You will need your sentences for another
exercise later in the chapter
Reading
Reading 1mdashCarnaval de Queacutebec
Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic
1 What do you know about the province of Quebec
2 Have you ever attended a carnival Where was the carnival What activities were planned as part of
the carnival
3 In what type of winter activities have you participated
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 925
Chapter 1
Pre-reading Activity Scanning for Information
1 Scan the map of Canada on page 3 to find Quebec City
2 Now scan Reading 1 (below) to find the following facts You have four minutes to complete this
exercise
Hints for Scanning As you complete the scanning exercise below you should look for the information i
a systematic way Move your eyes through the material thinking about where the information is likely
to be located Also identify the proper nouns or keywords in each question and then scan the article
for these words If the question asks you for the name of a place look for capitalized nouns in the text
If the question asks you for a number scan for digits or numbers expressed in words
___________ e number of people who
attend the Carnaval de
Queacutebec annually
___________ e name of the large castlenear the Quebec Parliament
Buildings
___________ e size of the Ice Hotel
Quebec-Canada
___________ e number of guest rooms
and suites in the Ice Hotel
___________ e traditional activity
located at Place Loto-
Quebec
[1] In the middle of winter Quebec City comes to life during the Quebec Winter Carnival
(Carnaval de Quebec) With over two weeks of music parades and winter sports this is
Quebec Cityrsquos Mardi Gras In fact the Carnaval de Quebec is the worldrsquos largest winter
carnival attracting more than a million people e carnival owes some of its high spirit
to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of brandy vodka sherry and port)
although there are many events during the winter carnival that are organized for families
Carnaval de Queacutebec
Quebec City Quebec
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1025
10 Chapter 1
[2] Watching over the carnival is
Bonhomme the festivalrsquos mascot1
Bonhomme is a large snowman
he is newly constructed each
year According to local stories
Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice
Palace an enormous castle built ofsnow and ice that is located near
the Quebec government buildings
e carnival has many highlights
ese include the snow sculpture
competition at Place Loto-
Quebec tobogganing down icy
slides for adults and children the
dogsledding competition through
the streets of Vieux-Quebec2 and
the annual Snow Bath in whichstrong Quebecois strip down to
their bathing suits in front of
a lively crowd and dive into a
snowdrift e annual canoe race
in which participants race across
the icy St Lawrence River is even
more daring
[3] While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for
visitors therersquos no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada
a 30 000-square-foot hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow Located on the
shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an
exhibition space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly
constructed each year from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice Admittedly it is
not the most comfortable choice of hotel for everyone but at least make time to visit
and perhaps have something cool to drinkmdashin an ice glass of coursemdashat the Ice Bar
1 mascot a symbol of an event
2 Vieux-Quebec the old part of Quebec City
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1020ndash1021) New York Workman Publishing
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1125
Chapter 1
Vocabulary in Context
Most of the vocabulary that you will study as you work your way through this textbook appears on the
academic word list of frequently used words It is important for you to learn these words since they will
appear in various readings and lectures in academic studies
Choose the best meaning for each of the italicized words in the sentences below
1 e carnival owes some of its high spirit to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of
brandy vodka sherry and port) although there are many events during the winter carnival that are
organized for families (paragraph 1)
a) customary
b) new
c) magnificent
2 Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year (paragraph 2)
a) is made b) is connected
c) is designed
3 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of
snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)
a) ldquopersonrdquo who was born in
b) ldquopersonrdquo who works at
c) ldquopersonrdquo who lives at
4 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of
snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)a) popular
b) very large
c) medium-sized
5 e carnival has many highlights (paragraph 2)
a) best parts
b) longest parts
c) strangest parts
6 ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-Quebec tobogganing down icy slides
for adults and children the dogsledding competition through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and theannual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively
crowd and dive into a snowdrift (paragraph 2)
a) weekly
b) monthly
c) yearly
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1225
12 Chapter 1
7 While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot hotel
constructed each winter of ice and snow (paragraph 3)
a) suitable
b) fun
c) active
8 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition
space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)
a) surrounded by
b) situated on
c) south of
9 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition
space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each yearfrom 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)
a) gymnasium
b) library
c) display
Vocabulary Learning Strategy Using Word Cards
Intentionally focusing your attention on words that are used frequently in English can help you increase
the size of your vocabulary Using word cards is one way to focus your attention on vocabulary items in
English
1 Take a small card (approximately 5 cm x 4 cm) and write one of the new vocabulary words from
Reading 1 on one side of the card
2 On the other side of the card do the following
a) Draw a picture that represents the meaning of the word or write the meaning of the word in
English (If you have difficulty expressing the meaning of the word in English you may write
the translation of the word in another language)
b) Write a sentence in English that uses the new word in a meaningful context If you have
difficulty composing a sentence using the word check with an English learnersrsquo dictionary for a
good sample sentence
3 Create a card for each word that was new to you in the vocabulary exercise for Reading 1
4 Until you are comfortable using the words on your word cards review the cards every day changing
the order in which you review them Saying the words out loud as you review them may help you
remember them
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec
Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec
Length
General activities
1
2
3
Number of people who attend
Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec
Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
1
2
3
Activities
1
2
3
4
5
Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada
Size
Materials used in construction
Location
Number of guest rooms
Other rooms in the hotel
1
2
3
4
Advice
Comprehension Check
1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425
14 Chapter 1
2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion
Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo
Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions
a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________
b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-
Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition
through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois
strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________
c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more
daring __________
d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot
hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________
e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________
3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before
You Die For whom do you think the book was written
4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not
Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands
Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic
1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places
to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of
the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada
2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know
about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article
compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525
Chapter 1
The Queen Charlotte Islands
British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada
[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte
Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means
Islands of the People) are the homeland of the
Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British
Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands
mostly on Graham Island and about half of
these people are Haida e islands are also home
to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life
Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off
the coast of British Columbia this group of 150
islands has developed its own species of flora1 and
fauna2
From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live
on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen
Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million
nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos
population of peregrine falcons and salmon
[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000
years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred
objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European
diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council
of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the
second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island
is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is
beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed
in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages
which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the
park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours
offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the
Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from
the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for
meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625
16 Chapter 1
1 flora plants that grow in a place
2 fauna animals that live in a place
3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing
Vocabulary in Context
In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described
flora all the plants that grow in a place
fauna all the animals that live in a place
1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or
fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you
make the best guesses that you can
Flora Fauna
black bears
cedar
deer mice
hemlock
peregrine falcons
salmon
seabirds
spruce
2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about the
Queen Charlotte Islands
Indigenous name
Information about people on the Islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
1
2
3
Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people
on the islands
e Haida people before contact with
Europeans
e Haida people after contact with
Europeans
Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii
Haanas National Park Reserve
and Haida Heritage Site
Description of the park
Visiting the park
1
2
Comprehension Check
Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825
18 Chapter 1
Writing
Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences
Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple
compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will
learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and
editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences
The Simple Sentence
1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb
that work together to create a complete thought
Example e woman spoke
Subject Verb
2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object
so that the thought is complete
Examples e carnival has many highlights
Subject Verb Object
Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve
Subject Verb Object
and Haida Heritage Site
3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information
Examples No logging is allowed in the park
Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase
e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world
Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase
A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A
prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence
4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence
below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object
Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people
Subject Subject Verb Object
for more than 10 000 years
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences
Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences
1 At a traditional ceremony __________
2 During the annual film festival __________
3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________
4 On the prairie __________
5 We had a cool drink __________
6 Alongside the river __________
7 Enormous trees have survived __________
8 At the appropriate time __________
Exercise 2
Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI
beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing
1 In the most unique city in Canada __________
2 CBC held a contest __________
3 Many Canadians voted __________
4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________
5 Canadians chose many different places __________
6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________
7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________
8 Was a resident of the settlement __________
9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________
10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________
Exercise 3
Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to
make sure that they are complete
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025
20 Chapter 1
The Compound Sentence
A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been
joined by a coordinating conjunction
e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences
for nor or soand but yet
Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions
and additional information
Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island
but contrasting information
Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island
or alternative ideas
Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island
so cause and effect
Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast
Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent
clauses
e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences
About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
people are Haida
eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence
Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural
Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan
2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery
3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba
5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls
6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the
Cabot Trail
7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map
Exercise 2
Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this
chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence
to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225
22 Chapter 1
Writing to Communicate
Writing Task
Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words
1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could
be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place
2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor
place a community or an event in a particular place
Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it
is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never
been to the place that you are describing
Organization Choosing Information
As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need
to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about
the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are
unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first
paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs
1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec
Basic Information Location of the event
Length of the event
General activities at the event
Number of people who attend the event
Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
Activities
Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size
Materials used in the construction
Location
Other details
Ice Hotel
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325
Chapter 1
2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands
Basic Information Indigenous name
Information about people on the islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans
After contact with Europeans
Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park
Visiting the park
Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place
you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us
these lists as an outline for your composition
Descriptive Writing Creating an Image
When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e
organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important
to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place
seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place
In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and
the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One
of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive
feeling but also create a mood
In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns
high spirit
lively crowd welcoming environment
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425
24 Chapter 1
In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to
create a very different mood
distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands
incredibly rich diversity of biological life
masterful carvers
magnificent villages unique history
huge cedar spruce and hemlock
abandoned villages
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four
descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers
Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that
convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers
choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting
information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers
Revising and Editing
Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and
want to know Consider the following questions
bull Could your reader find the place on a map
bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader
bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place
Step 2Focus on your word choice
bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey
Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete
bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb
bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 625
6 Chapter 1
Exercise 3
As a class brainstorm a list of 10 to 15 adjectives that could be used to describe someonersquos home en
decide whether each adjective is neutral or expresses a positive or negative opinion
Understanding Collocation In English there are words that fit with some words better than they fit with other words is is called
collocation
Certain adjectives collocate with certain nouns but do not collocate with other nouns For example
we can say that ldquoe man has blond hair rdquo but we would not say that ldquoe man has a blond car rdquo e
adjective blond is collocated with very few nouns We might say that ldquoe man has a tan car rdquo
Exercise
e adjectives in the chart below collocate with the word city Decide whether each adjective is neutral
or expresses an opinion en discuss your understanding with your classmates
Adjective Is NeutralExpresses aPositive Opinion
Expresses aNegative Opinion
large
enormous
quiet
magnificent
unique
beautiful
interesting
fun
small
sleepy
incredible
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 725
Chapter 1
Distinguishing Facts from Opinions in Reading
An important reading skill is to be able to distinguish facts from opinions Paying attention to the
adjectives that a writer uses to describe can help you determine whether a statement is a statement of
fact or opinion In addition to adjectives writers and speakers sometimes use special words or phrases
for emphasis in opinion or feeling statements ese words include the following
truly there can be no doubt that
honestly without a doubt
absolutely certainly
incredibly
Watch for these words and phrases in your reading
Exercise 1
Read the following statements and identify which statements express facts and which statements
express opinions Mark an ldquoFrdquo beside each fact and an ldquoOrdquo beside each opinion
1 e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world ____
2 e Bay of Fundy is a unique and fascinating place with its magnificent body of water and
incredible variety of wildlife ____
3 Nahanni National Park is included on UNESCOrsquos World Heritage List ____
4 Nahanni National Park is absolutely unspoiled by the impact of human development ____
5 e Cabot Trail runs through the Cape Breton Highlands ____
6 e Cabot Trail is named after an explorer named John Cabot ____7 When you travel through the Rockies you are at the top of the world ____
8 Banff is located in the Rockies ____
9 e Sleeping Giant is actually a natural rock peninsula that juts into Lake Superior ____
10 e northern lights are also called aurora borealis ____
11 e northern lights are truly spectacular ____
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 825
8 Chapter 1
Exercise 2
Choose one of the seven wonders of Canada Search online or interview a friend to learn more about
the place en in sentence form write four statements of fact about the wonder and two statements of
opinion about the wonder Share these statements with your classmates Ask your classmates to identify
which statements are facts and which are opinions
1 _____________________________________________________________________
2 ______________________________________________________________________
3 ______________________________________________________________________
4 ______________________________________________________________________
1 ______________________________________________________________________
2 ______________________________________________________________________
Keep the sentences that you have written in this exercise You will need your sentences for another
exercise later in the chapter
Reading
Reading 1mdashCarnaval de Queacutebec
Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic
1 What do you know about the province of Quebec
2 Have you ever attended a carnival Where was the carnival What activities were planned as part of
the carnival
3 In what type of winter activities have you participated
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 925
Chapter 1
Pre-reading Activity Scanning for Information
1 Scan the map of Canada on page 3 to find Quebec City
2 Now scan Reading 1 (below) to find the following facts You have four minutes to complete this
exercise
Hints for Scanning As you complete the scanning exercise below you should look for the information i
a systematic way Move your eyes through the material thinking about where the information is likely
to be located Also identify the proper nouns or keywords in each question and then scan the article
for these words If the question asks you for the name of a place look for capitalized nouns in the text
If the question asks you for a number scan for digits or numbers expressed in words
___________ e number of people who
attend the Carnaval de
Queacutebec annually
___________ e name of the large castlenear the Quebec Parliament
Buildings
___________ e size of the Ice Hotel
Quebec-Canada
___________ e number of guest rooms
and suites in the Ice Hotel
___________ e traditional activity
located at Place Loto-
Quebec
[1] In the middle of winter Quebec City comes to life during the Quebec Winter Carnival
(Carnaval de Quebec) With over two weeks of music parades and winter sports this is
Quebec Cityrsquos Mardi Gras In fact the Carnaval de Quebec is the worldrsquos largest winter
carnival attracting more than a million people e carnival owes some of its high spirit
to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of brandy vodka sherry and port)
although there are many events during the winter carnival that are organized for families
Carnaval de Queacutebec
Quebec City Quebec
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1025
10 Chapter 1
[2] Watching over the carnival is
Bonhomme the festivalrsquos mascot1
Bonhomme is a large snowman
he is newly constructed each
year According to local stories
Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice
Palace an enormous castle built ofsnow and ice that is located near
the Quebec government buildings
e carnival has many highlights
ese include the snow sculpture
competition at Place Loto-
Quebec tobogganing down icy
slides for adults and children the
dogsledding competition through
the streets of Vieux-Quebec2 and
the annual Snow Bath in whichstrong Quebecois strip down to
their bathing suits in front of
a lively crowd and dive into a
snowdrift e annual canoe race
in which participants race across
the icy St Lawrence River is even
more daring
[3] While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for
visitors therersquos no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada
a 30 000-square-foot hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow Located on the
shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an
exhibition space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly
constructed each year from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice Admittedly it is
not the most comfortable choice of hotel for everyone but at least make time to visit
and perhaps have something cool to drinkmdashin an ice glass of coursemdashat the Ice Bar
1 mascot a symbol of an event
2 Vieux-Quebec the old part of Quebec City
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1020ndash1021) New York Workman Publishing
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1125
Chapter 1
Vocabulary in Context
Most of the vocabulary that you will study as you work your way through this textbook appears on the
academic word list of frequently used words It is important for you to learn these words since they will
appear in various readings and lectures in academic studies
Choose the best meaning for each of the italicized words in the sentences below
1 e carnival owes some of its high spirit to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of
brandy vodka sherry and port) although there are many events during the winter carnival that are
organized for families (paragraph 1)
a) customary
b) new
c) magnificent
2 Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year (paragraph 2)
a) is made b) is connected
c) is designed
3 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of
snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)
a) ldquopersonrdquo who was born in
b) ldquopersonrdquo who works at
c) ldquopersonrdquo who lives at
4 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of
snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)a) popular
b) very large
c) medium-sized
5 e carnival has many highlights (paragraph 2)
a) best parts
b) longest parts
c) strangest parts
6 ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-Quebec tobogganing down icy slides
for adults and children the dogsledding competition through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and theannual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively
crowd and dive into a snowdrift (paragraph 2)
a) weekly
b) monthly
c) yearly
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1225
12 Chapter 1
7 While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot hotel
constructed each winter of ice and snow (paragraph 3)
a) suitable
b) fun
c) active
8 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition
space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)
a) surrounded by
b) situated on
c) south of
9 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition
space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each yearfrom 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)
a) gymnasium
b) library
c) display
Vocabulary Learning Strategy Using Word Cards
Intentionally focusing your attention on words that are used frequently in English can help you increase
the size of your vocabulary Using word cards is one way to focus your attention on vocabulary items in
English
1 Take a small card (approximately 5 cm x 4 cm) and write one of the new vocabulary words from
Reading 1 on one side of the card
2 On the other side of the card do the following
a) Draw a picture that represents the meaning of the word or write the meaning of the word in
English (If you have difficulty expressing the meaning of the word in English you may write
the translation of the word in another language)
b) Write a sentence in English that uses the new word in a meaningful context If you have
difficulty composing a sentence using the word check with an English learnersrsquo dictionary for a
good sample sentence
3 Create a card for each word that was new to you in the vocabulary exercise for Reading 1
4 Until you are comfortable using the words on your word cards review the cards every day changing
the order in which you review them Saying the words out loud as you review them may help you
remember them
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec
Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec
Length
General activities
1
2
3
Number of people who attend
Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec
Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
1
2
3
Activities
1
2
3
4
5
Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada
Size
Materials used in construction
Location
Number of guest rooms
Other rooms in the hotel
1
2
3
4
Advice
Comprehension Check
1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425
14 Chapter 1
2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion
Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo
Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions
a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________
b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-
Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition
through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois
strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________
c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more
daring __________
d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot
hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________
e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________
3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before
You Die For whom do you think the book was written
4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not
Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands
Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic
1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places
to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of
the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada
2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know
about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article
compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525
Chapter 1
The Queen Charlotte Islands
British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada
[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte
Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means
Islands of the People) are the homeland of the
Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British
Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands
mostly on Graham Island and about half of
these people are Haida e islands are also home
to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life
Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off
the coast of British Columbia this group of 150
islands has developed its own species of flora1 and
fauna2
From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live
on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen
Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million
nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos
population of peregrine falcons and salmon
[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000
years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred
objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European
diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council
of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the
second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island
is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is
beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed
in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages
which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the
park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours
offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the
Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from
the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for
meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625
16 Chapter 1
1 flora plants that grow in a place
2 fauna animals that live in a place
3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing
Vocabulary in Context
In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described
flora all the plants that grow in a place
fauna all the animals that live in a place
1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or
fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you
make the best guesses that you can
Flora Fauna
black bears
cedar
deer mice
hemlock
peregrine falcons
salmon
seabirds
spruce
2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about the
Queen Charlotte Islands
Indigenous name
Information about people on the Islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
1
2
3
Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people
on the islands
e Haida people before contact with
Europeans
e Haida people after contact with
Europeans
Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii
Haanas National Park Reserve
and Haida Heritage Site
Description of the park
Visiting the park
1
2
Comprehension Check
Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825
18 Chapter 1
Writing
Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences
Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple
compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will
learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and
editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences
The Simple Sentence
1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb
that work together to create a complete thought
Example e woman spoke
Subject Verb
2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object
so that the thought is complete
Examples e carnival has many highlights
Subject Verb Object
Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve
Subject Verb Object
and Haida Heritage Site
3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information
Examples No logging is allowed in the park
Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase
e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world
Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase
A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A
prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence
4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence
below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object
Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people
Subject Subject Verb Object
for more than 10 000 years
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences
Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences
1 At a traditional ceremony __________
2 During the annual film festival __________
3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________
4 On the prairie __________
5 We had a cool drink __________
6 Alongside the river __________
7 Enormous trees have survived __________
8 At the appropriate time __________
Exercise 2
Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI
beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing
1 In the most unique city in Canada __________
2 CBC held a contest __________
3 Many Canadians voted __________
4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________
5 Canadians chose many different places __________
6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________
7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________
8 Was a resident of the settlement __________
9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________
10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________
Exercise 3
Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to
make sure that they are complete
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025
20 Chapter 1
The Compound Sentence
A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been
joined by a coordinating conjunction
e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences
for nor or soand but yet
Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions
and additional information
Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island
but contrasting information
Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island
or alternative ideas
Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island
so cause and effect
Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast
Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent
clauses
e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences
About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
people are Haida
eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence
Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural
Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan
2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery
3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba
5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls
6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the
Cabot Trail
7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map
Exercise 2
Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this
chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence
to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225
22 Chapter 1
Writing to Communicate
Writing Task
Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words
1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could
be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place
2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor
place a community or an event in a particular place
Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it
is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never
been to the place that you are describing
Organization Choosing Information
As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need
to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about
the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are
unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first
paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs
1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec
Basic Information Location of the event
Length of the event
General activities at the event
Number of people who attend the event
Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
Activities
Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size
Materials used in the construction
Location
Other details
Ice Hotel
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325
Chapter 1
2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands
Basic Information Indigenous name
Information about people on the islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans
After contact with Europeans
Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park
Visiting the park
Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place
you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us
these lists as an outline for your composition
Descriptive Writing Creating an Image
When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e
organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important
to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place
seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place
In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and
the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One
of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive
feeling but also create a mood
In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns
high spirit
lively crowd welcoming environment
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425
24 Chapter 1
In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to
create a very different mood
distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands
incredibly rich diversity of biological life
masterful carvers
magnificent villages unique history
huge cedar spruce and hemlock
abandoned villages
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four
descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers
Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that
convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers
choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting
information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers
Revising and Editing
Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and
want to know Consider the following questions
bull Could your reader find the place on a map
bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader
bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place
Step 2Focus on your word choice
bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey
Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete
bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb
bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 725
Chapter 1
Distinguishing Facts from Opinions in Reading
An important reading skill is to be able to distinguish facts from opinions Paying attention to the
adjectives that a writer uses to describe can help you determine whether a statement is a statement of
fact or opinion In addition to adjectives writers and speakers sometimes use special words or phrases
for emphasis in opinion or feeling statements ese words include the following
truly there can be no doubt that
honestly without a doubt
absolutely certainly
incredibly
Watch for these words and phrases in your reading
Exercise 1
Read the following statements and identify which statements express facts and which statements
express opinions Mark an ldquoFrdquo beside each fact and an ldquoOrdquo beside each opinion
1 e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world ____
2 e Bay of Fundy is a unique and fascinating place with its magnificent body of water and
incredible variety of wildlife ____
3 Nahanni National Park is included on UNESCOrsquos World Heritage List ____
4 Nahanni National Park is absolutely unspoiled by the impact of human development ____
5 e Cabot Trail runs through the Cape Breton Highlands ____
6 e Cabot Trail is named after an explorer named John Cabot ____7 When you travel through the Rockies you are at the top of the world ____
8 Banff is located in the Rockies ____
9 e Sleeping Giant is actually a natural rock peninsula that juts into Lake Superior ____
10 e northern lights are also called aurora borealis ____
11 e northern lights are truly spectacular ____
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 825
8 Chapter 1
Exercise 2
Choose one of the seven wonders of Canada Search online or interview a friend to learn more about
the place en in sentence form write four statements of fact about the wonder and two statements of
opinion about the wonder Share these statements with your classmates Ask your classmates to identify
which statements are facts and which are opinions
1 _____________________________________________________________________
2 ______________________________________________________________________
3 ______________________________________________________________________
4 ______________________________________________________________________
1 ______________________________________________________________________
2 ______________________________________________________________________
Keep the sentences that you have written in this exercise You will need your sentences for another
exercise later in the chapter
Reading
Reading 1mdashCarnaval de Queacutebec
Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic
1 What do you know about the province of Quebec
2 Have you ever attended a carnival Where was the carnival What activities were planned as part of
the carnival
3 In what type of winter activities have you participated
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 925
Chapter 1
Pre-reading Activity Scanning for Information
1 Scan the map of Canada on page 3 to find Quebec City
2 Now scan Reading 1 (below) to find the following facts You have four minutes to complete this
exercise
Hints for Scanning As you complete the scanning exercise below you should look for the information i
a systematic way Move your eyes through the material thinking about where the information is likely
to be located Also identify the proper nouns or keywords in each question and then scan the article
for these words If the question asks you for the name of a place look for capitalized nouns in the text
If the question asks you for a number scan for digits or numbers expressed in words
___________ e number of people who
attend the Carnaval de
Queacutebec annually
___________ e name of the large castlenear the Quebec Parliament
Buildings
___________ e size of the Ice Hotel
Quebec-Canada
___________ e number of guest rooms
and suites in the Ice Hotel
___________ e traditional activity
located at Place Loto-
Quebec
[1] In the middle of winter Quebec City comes to life during the Quebec Winter Carnival
(Carnaval de Quebec) With over two weeks of music parades and winter sports this is
Quebec Cityrsquos Mardi Gras In fact the Carnaval de Quebec is the worldrsquos largest winter
carnival attracting more than a million people e carnival owes some of its high spirit
to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of brandy vodka sherry and port)
although there are many events during the winter carnival that are organized for families
Carnaval de Queacutebec
Quebec City Quebec
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1025
10 Chapter 1
[2] Watching over the carnival is
Bonhomme the festivalrsquos mascot1
Bonhomme is a large snowman
he is newly constructed each
year According to local stories
Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice
Palace an enormous castle built ofsnow and ice that is located near
the Quebec government buildings
e carnival has many highlights
ese include the snow sculpture
competition at Place Loto-
Quebec tobogganing down icy
slides for adults and children the
dogsledding competition through
the streets of Vieux-Quebec2 and
the annual Snow Bath in whichstrong Quebecois strip down to
their bathing suits in front of
a lively crowd and dive into a
snowdrift e annual canoe race
in which participants race across
the icy St Lawrence River is even
more daring
[3] While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for
visitors therersquos no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada
a 30 000-square-foot hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow Located on the
shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an
exhibition space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly
constructed each year from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice Admittedly it is
not the most comfortable choice of hotel for everyone but at least make time to visit
and perhaps have something cool to drinkmdashin an ice glass of coursemdashat the Ice Bar
1 mascot a symbol of an event
2 Vieux-Quebec the old part of Quebec City
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1020ndash1021) New York Workman Publishing
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1125
Chapter 1
Vocabulary in Context
Most of the vocabulary that you will study as you work your way through this textbook appears on the
academic word list of frequently used words It is important for you to learn these words since they will
appear in various readings and lectures in academic studies
Choose the best meaning for each of the italicized words in the sentences below
1 e carnival owes some of its high spirit to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of
brandy vodka sherry and port) although there are many events during the winter carnival that are
organized for families (paragraph 1)
a) customary
b) new
c) magnificent
2 Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year (paragraph 2)
a) is made b) is connected
c) is designed
3 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of
snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)
a) ldquopersonrdquo who was born in
b) ldquopersonrdquo who works at
c) ldquopersonrdquo who lives at
4 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of
snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)a) popular
b) very large
c) medium-sized
5 e carnival has many highlights (paragraph 2)
a) best parts
b) longest parts
c) strangest parts
6 ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-Quebec tobogganing down icy slides
for adults and children the dogsledding competition through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and theannual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively
crowd and dive into a snowdrift (paragraph 2)
a) weekly
b) monthly
c) yearly
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1225
12 Chapter 1
7 While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot hotel
constructed each winter of ice and snow (paragraph 3)
a) suitable
b) fun
c) active
8 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition
space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)
a) surrounded by
b) situated on
c) south of
9 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition
space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each yearfrom 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)
a) gymnasium
b) library
c) display
Vocabulary Learning Strategy Using Word Cards
Intentionally focusing your attention on words that are used frequently in English can help you increase
the size of your vocabulary Using word cards is one way to focus your attention on vocabulary items in
English
1 Take a small card (approximately 5 cm x 4 cm) and write one of the new vocabulary words from
Reading 1 on one side of the card
2 On the other side of the card do the following
a) Draw a picture that represents the meaning of the word or write the meaning of the word in
English (If you have difficulty expressing the meaning of the word in English you may write
the translation of the word in another language)
b) Write a sentence in English that uses the new word in a meaningful context If you have
difficulty composing a sentence using the word check with an English learnersrsquo dictionary for a
good sample sentence
3 Create a card for each word that was new to you in the vocabulary exercise for Reading 1
4 Until you are comfortable using the words on your word cards review the cards every day changing
the order in which you review them Saying the words out loud as you review them may help you
remember them
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec
Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec
Length
General activities
1
2
3
Number of people who attend
Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec
Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
1
2
3
Activities
1
2
3
4
5
Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada
Size
Materials used in construction
Location
Number of guest rooms
Other rooms in the hotel
1
2
3
4
Advice
Comprehension Check
1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425
14 Chapter 1
2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion
Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo
Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions
a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________
b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-
Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition
through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois
strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________
c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more
daring __________
d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot
hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________
e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________
3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before
You Die For whom do you think the book was written
4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not
Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands
Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic
1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places
to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of
the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada
2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know
about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article
compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525
Chapter 1
The Queen Charlotte Islands
British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada
[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte
Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means
Islands of the People) are the homeland of the
Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British
Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands
mostly on Graham Island and about half of
these people are Haida e islands are also home
to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life
Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off
the coast of British Columbia this group of 150
islands has developed its own species of flora1 and
fauna2
From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live
on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen
Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million
nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos
population of peregrine falcons and salmon
[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000
years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred
objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European
diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council
of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the
second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island
is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is
beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed
in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages
which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the
park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours
offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the
Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from
the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for
meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625
16 Chapter 1
1 flora plants that grow in a place
2 fauna animals that live in a place
3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing
Vocabulary in Context
In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described
flora all the plants that grow in a place
fauna all the animals that live in a place
1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or
fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you
make the best guesses that you can
Flora Fauna
black bears
cedar
deer mice
hemlock
peregrine falcons
salmon
seabirds
spruce
2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about the
Queen Charlotte Islands
Indigenous name
Information about people on the Islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
1
2
3
Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people
on the islands
e Haida people before contact with
Europeans
e Haida people after contact with
Europeans
Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii
Haanas National Park Reserve
and Haida Heritage Site
Description of the park
Visiting the park
1
2
Comprehension Check
Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825
18 Chapter 1
Writing
Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences
Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple
compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will
learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and
editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences
The Simple Sentence
1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb
that work together to create a complete thought
Example e woman spoke
Subject Verb
2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object
so that the thought is complete
Examples e carnival has many highlights
Subject Verb Object
Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve
Subject Verb Object
and Haida Heritage Site
3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information
Examples No logging is allowed in the park
Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase
e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world
Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase
A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A
prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence
4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence
below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object
Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people
Subject Subject Verb Object
for more than 10 000 years
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences
Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences
1 At a traditional ceremony __________
2 During the annual film festival __________
3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________
4 On the prairie __________
5 We had a cool drink __________
6 Alongside the river __________
7 Enormous trees have survived __________
8 At the appropriate time __________
Exercise 2
Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI
beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing
1 In the most unique city in Canada __________
2 CBC held a contest __________
3 Many Canadians voted __________
4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________
5 Canadians chose many different places __________
6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________
7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________
8 Was a resident of the settlement __________
9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________
10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________
Exercise 3
Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to
make sure that they are complete
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025
20 Chapter 1
The Compound Sentence
A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been
joined by a coordinating conjunction
e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences
for nor or soand but yet
Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions
and additional information
Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island
but contrasting information
Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island
or alternative ideas
Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island
so cause and effect
Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast
Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent
clauses
e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences
About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
people are Haida
eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence
Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural
Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan
2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery
3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba
5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls
6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the
Cabot Trail
7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map
Exercise 2
Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this
chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence
to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225
22 Chapter 1
Writing to Communicate
Writing Task
Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words
1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could
be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place
2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor
place a community or an event in a particular place
Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it
is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never
been to the place that you are describing
Organization Choosing Information
As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need
to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about
the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are
unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first
paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs
1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec
Basic Information Location of the event
Length of the event
General activities at the event
Number of people who attend the event
Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
Activities
Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size
Materials used in the construction
Location
Other details
Ice Hotel
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325
Chapter 1
2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands
Basic Information Indigenous name
Information about people on the islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans
After contact with Europeans
Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park
Visiting the park
Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place
you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us
these lists as an outline for your composition
Descriptive Writing Creating an Image
When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e
organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important
to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place
seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place
In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and
the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One
of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive
feeling but also create a mood
In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns
high spirit
lively crowd welcoming environment
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425
24 Chapter 1
In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to
create a very different mood
distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands
incredibly rich diversity of biological life
masterful carvers
magnificent villages unique history
huge cedar spruce and hemlock
abandoned villages
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four
descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers
Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that
convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers
choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting
information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers
Revising and Editing
Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and
want to know Consider the following questions
bull Could your reader find the place on a map
bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader
bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place
Step 2Focus on your word choice
bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey
Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete
bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb
bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 825
8 Chapter 1
Exercise 2
Choose one of the seven wonders of Canada Search online or interview a friend to learn more about
the place en in sentence form write four statements of fact about the wonder and two statements of
opinion about the wonder Share these statements with your classmates Ask your classmates to identify
which statements are facts and which are opinions
1 _____________________________________________________________________
2 ______________________________________________________________________
3 ______________________________________________________________________
4 ______________________________________________________________________
1 ______________________________________________________________________
2 ______________________________________________________________________
Keep the sentences that you have written in this exercise You will need your sentences for another
exercise later in the chapter
Reading
Reading 1mdashCarnaval de Queacutebec
Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic
1 What do you know about the province of Quebec
2 Have you ever attended a carnival Where was the carnival What activities were planned as part of
the carnival
3 In what type of winter activities have you participated
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 925
Chapter 1
Pre-reading Activity Scanning for Information
1 Scan the map of Canada on page 3 to find Quebec City
2 Now scan Reading 1 (below) to find the following facts You have four minutes to complete this
exercise
Hints for Scanning As you complete the scanning exercise below you should look for the information i
a systematic way Move your eyes through the material thinking about where the information is likely
to be located Also identify the proper nouns or keywords in each question and then scan the article
for these words If the question asks you for the name of a place look for capitalized nouns in the text
If the question asks you for a number scan for digits or numbers expressed in words
___________ e number of people who
attend the Carnaval de
Queacutebec annually
___________ e name of the large castlenear the Quebec Parliament
Buildings
___________ e size of the Ice Hotel
Quebec-Canada
___________ e number of guest rooms
and suites in the Ice Hotel
___________ e traditional activity
located at Place Loto-
Quebec
[1] In the middle of winter Quebec City comes to life during the Quebec Winter Carnival
(Carnaval de Quebec) With over two weeks of music parades and winter sports this is
Quebec Cityrsquos Mardi Gras In fact the Carnaval de Quebec is the worldrsquos largest winter
carnival attracting more than a million people e carnival owes some of its high spirit
to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of brandy vodka sherry and port)
although there are many events during the winter carnival that are organized for families
Carnaval de Queacutebec
Quebec City Quebec
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1025
10 Chapter 1
[2] Watching over the carnival is
Bonhomme the festivalrsquos mascot1
Bonhomme is a large snowman
he is newly constructed each
year According to local stories
Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice
Palace an enormous castle built ofsnow and ice that is located near
the Quebec government buildings
e carnival has many highlights
ese include the snow sculpture
competition at Place Loto-
Quebec tobogganing down icy
slides for adults and children the
dogsledding competition through
the streets of Vieux-Quebec2 and
the annual Snow Bath in whichstrong Quebecois strip down to
their bathing suits in front of
a lively crowd and dive into a
snowdrift e annual canoe race
in which participants race across
the icy St Lawrence River is even
more daring
[3] While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for
visitors therersquos no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada
a 30 000-square-foot hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow Located on the
shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an
exhibition space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly
constructed each year from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice Admittedly it is
not the most comfortable choice of hotel for everyone but at least make time to visit
and perhaps have something cool to drinkmdashin an ice glass of coursemdashat the Ice Bar
1 mascot a symbol of an event
2 Vieux-Quebec the old part of Quebec City
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1020ndash1021) New York Workman Publishing
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1125
Chapter 1
Vocabulary in Context
Most of the vocabulary that you will study as you work your way through this textbook appears on the
academic word list of frequently used words It is important for you to learn these words since they will
appear in various readings and lectures in academic studies
Choose the best meaning for each of the italicized words in the sentences below
1 e carnival owes some of its high spirit to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of
brandy vodka sherry and port) although there are many events during the winter carnival that are
organized for families (paragraph 1)
a) customary
b) new
c) magnificent
2 Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year (paragraph 2)
a) is made b) is connected
c) is designed
3 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of
snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)
a) ldquopersonrdquo who was born in
b) ldquopersonrdquo who works at
c) ldquopersonrdquo who lives at
4 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of
snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)a) popular
b) very large
c) medium-sized
5 e carnival has many highlights (paragraph 2)
a) best parts
b) longest parts
c) strangest parts
6 ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-Quebec tobogganing down icy slides
for adults and children the dogsledding competition through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and theannual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively
crowd and dive into a snowdrift (paragraph 2)
a) weekly
b) monthly
c) yearly
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1225
12 Chapter 1
7 While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot hotel
constructed each winter of ice and snow (paragraph 3)
a) suitable
b) fun
c) active
8 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition
space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)
a) surrounded by
b) situated on
c) south of
9 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition
space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each yearfrom 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)
a) gymnasium
b) library
c) display
Vocabulary Learning Strategy Using Word Cards
Intentionally focusing your attention on words that are used frequently in English can help you increase
the size of your vocabulary Using word cards is one way to focus your attention on vocabulary items in
English
1 Take a small card (approximately 5 cm x 4 cm) and write one of the new vocabulary words from
Reading 1 on one side of the card
2 On the other side of the card do the following
a) Draw a picture that represents the meaning of the word or write the meaning of the word in
English (If you have difficulty expressing the meaning of the word in English you may write
the translation of the word in another language)
b) Write a sentence in English that uses the new word in a meaningful context If you have
difficulty composing a sentence using the word check with an English learnersrsquo dictionary for a
good sample sentence
3 Create a card for each word that was new to you in the vocabulary exercise for Reading 1
4 Until you are comfortable using the words on your word cards review the cards every day changing
the order in which you review them Saying the words out loud as you review them may help you
remember them
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec
Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec
Length
General activities
1
2
3
Number of people who attend
Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec
Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
1
2
3
Activities
1
2
3
4
5
Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada
Size
Materials used in construction
Location
Number of guest rooms
Other rooms in the hotel
1
2
3
4
Advice
Comprehension Check
1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425
14 Chapter 1
2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion
Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo
Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions
a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________
b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-
Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition
through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois
strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________
c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more
daring __________
d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot
hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________
e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________
3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before
You Die For whom do you think the book was written
4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not
Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands
Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic
1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places
to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of
the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada
2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know
about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article
compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525
Chapter 1
The Queen Charlotte Islands
British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada
[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte
Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means
Islands of the People) are the homeland of the
Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British
Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands
mostly on Graham Island and about half of
these people are Haida e islands are also home
to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life
Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off
the coast of British Columbia this group of 150
islands has developed its own species of flora1 and
fauna2
From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live
on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen
Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million
nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos
population of peregrine falcons and salmon
[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000
years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred
objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European
diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council
of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the
second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island
is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is
beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed
in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages
which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the
park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours
offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the
Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from
the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for
meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625
16 Chapter 1
1 flora plants that grow in a place
2 fauna animals that live in a place
3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing
Vocabulary in Context
In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described
flora all the plants that grow in a place
fauna all the animals that live in a place
1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or
fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you
make the best guesses that you can
Flora Fauna
black bears
cedar
deer mice
hemlock
peregrine falcons
salmon
seabirds
spruce
2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about the
Queen Charlotte Islands
Indigenous name
Information about people on the Islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
1
2
3
Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people
on the islands
e Haida people before contact with
Europeans
e Haida people after contact with
Europeans
Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii
Haanas National Park Reserve
and Haida Heritage Site
Description of the park
Visiting the park
1
2
Comprehension Check
Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825
18 Chapter 1
Writing
Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences
Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple
compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will
learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and
editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences
The Simple Sentence
1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb
that work together to create a complete thought
Example e woman spoke
Subject Verb
2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object
so that the thought is complete
Examples e carnival has many highlights
Subject Verb Object
Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve
Subject Verb Object
and Haida Heritage Site
3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information
Examples No logging is allowed in the park
Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase
e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world
Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase
A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A
prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence
4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence
below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object
Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people
Subject Subject Verb Object
for more than 10 000 years
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences
Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences
1 At a traditional ceremony __________
2 During the annual film festival __________
3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________
4 On the prairie __________
5 We had a cool drink __________
6 Alongside the river __________
7 Enormous trees have survived __________
8 At the appropriate time __________
Exercise 2
Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI
beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing
1 In the most unique city in Canada __________
2 CBC held a contest __________
3 Many Canadians voted __________
4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________
5 Canadians chose many different places __________
6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________
7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________
8 Was a resident of the settlement __________
9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________
10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________
Exercise 3
Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to
make sure that they are complete
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025
20 Chapter 1
The Compound Sentence
A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been
joined by a coordinating conjunction
e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences
for nor or soand but yet
Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions
and additional information
Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island
but contrasting information
Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island
or alternative ideas
Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island
so cause and effect
Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast
Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent
clauses
e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences
About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
people are Haida
eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence
Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural
Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan
2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery
3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba
5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls
6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the
Cabot Trail
7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map
Exercise 2
Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this
chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence
to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225
22 Chapter 1
Writing to Communicate
Writing Task
Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words
1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could
be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place
2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor
place a community or an event in a particular place
Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it
is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never
been to the place that you are describing
Organization Choosing Information
As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need
to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about
the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are
unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first
paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs
1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec
Basic Information Location of the event
Length of the event
General activities at the event
Number of people who attend the event
Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
Activities
Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size
Materials used in the construction
Location
Other details
Ice Hotel
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325
Chapter 1
2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands
Basic Information Indigenous name
Information about people on the islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans
After contact with Europeans
Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park
Visiting the park
Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place
you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us
these lists as an outline for your composition
Descriptive Writing Creating an Image
When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e
organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important
to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place
seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place
In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and
the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One
of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive
feeling but also create a mood
In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns
high spirit
lively crowd welcoming environment
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425
24 Chapter 1
In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to
create a very different mood
distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands
incredibly rich diversity of biological life
masterful carvers
magnificent villages unique history
huge cedar spruce and hemlock
abandoned villages
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four
descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers
Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that
convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers
choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting
information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers
Revising and Editing
Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and
want to know Consider the following questions
bull Could your reader find the place on a map
bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader
bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place
Step 2Focus on your word choice
bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey
Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete
bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb
bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 925
Chapter 1
Pre-reading Activity Scanning for Information
1 Scan the map of Canada on page 3 to find Quebec City
2 Now scan Reading 1 (below) to find the following facts You have four minutes to complete this
exercise
Hints for Scanning As you complete the scanning exercise below you should look for the information i
a systematic way Move your eyes through the material thinking about where the information is likely
to be located Also identify the proper nouns or keywords in each question and then scan the article
for these words If the question asks you for the name of a place look for capitalized nouns in the text
If the question asks you for a number scan for digits or numbers expressed in words
___________ e number of people who
attend the Carnaval de
Queacutebec annually
___________ e name of the large castlenear the Quebec Parliament
Buildings
___________ e size of the Ice Hotel
Quebec-Canada
___________ e number of guest rooms
and suites in the Ice Hotel
___________ e traditional activity
located at Place Loto-
Quebec
[1] In the middle of winter Quebec City comes to life during the Quebec Winter Carnival
(Carnaval de Quebec) With over two weeks of music parades and winter sports this is
Quebec Cityrsquos Mardi Gras In fact the Carnaval de Quebec is the worldrsquos largest winter
carnival attracting more than a million people e carnival owes some of its high spirit
to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of brandy vodka sherry and port)
although there are many events during the winter carnival that are organized for families
Carnaval de Queacutebec
Quebec City Quebec
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1025
10 Chapter 1
[2] Watching over the carnival is
Bonhomme the festivalrsquos mascot1
Bonhomme is a large snowman
he is newly constructed each
year According to local stories
Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice
Palace an enormous castle built ofsnow and ice that is located near
the Quebec government buildings
e carnival has many highlights
ese include the snow sculpture
competition at Place Loto-
Quebec tobogganing down icy
slides for adults and children the
dogsledding competition through
the streets of Vieux-Quebec2 and
the annual Snow Bath in whichstrong Quebecois strip down to
their bathing suits in front of
a lively crowd and dive into a
snowdrift e annual canoe race
in which participants race across
the icy St Lawrence River is even
more daring
[3] While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for
visitors therersquos no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada
a 30 000-square-foot hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow Located on the
shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an
exhibition space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly
constructed each year from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice Admittedly it is
not the most comfortable choice of hotel for everyone but at least make time to visit
and perhaps have something cool to drinkmdashin an ice glass of coursemdashat the Ice Bar
1 mascot a symbol of an event
2 Vieux-Quebec the old part of Quebec City
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1020ndash1021) New York Workman Publishing
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1125
Chapter 1
Vocabulary in Context
Most of the vocabulary that you will study as you work your way through this textbook appears on the
academic word list of frequently used words It is important for you to learn these words since they will
appear in various readings and lectures in academic studies
Choose the best meaning for each of the italicized words in the sentences below
1 e carnival owes some of its high spirit to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of
brandy vodka sherry and port) although there are many events during the winter carnival that are
organized for families (paragraph 1)
a) customary
b) new
c) magnificent
2 Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year (paragraph 2)
a) is made b) is connected
c) is designed
3 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of
snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)
a) ldquopersonrdquo who was born in
b) ldquopersonrdquo who works at
c) ldquopersonrdquo who lives at
4 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of
snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)a) popular
b) very large
c) medium-sized
5 e carnival has many highlights (paragraph 2)
a) best parts
b) longest parts
c) strangest parts
6 ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-Quebec tobogganing down icy slides
for adults and children the dogsledding competition through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and theannual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively
crowd and dive into a snowdrift (paragraph 2)
a) weekly
b) monthly
c) yearly
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1225
12 Chapter 1
7 While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot hotel
constructed each winter of ice and snow (paragraph 3)
a) suitable
b) fun
c) active
8 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition
space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)
a) surrounded by
b) situated on
c) south of
9 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition
space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each yearfrom 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)
a) gymnasium
b) library
c) display
Vocabulary Learning Strategy Using Word Cards
Intentionally focusing your attention on words that are used frequently in English can help you increase
the size of your vocabulary Using word cards is one way to focus your attention on vocabulary items in
English
1 Take a small card (approximately 5 cm x 4 cm) and write one of the new vocabulary words from
Reading 1 on one side of the card
2 On the other side of the card do the following
a) Draw a picture that represents the meaning of the word or write the meaning of the word in
English (If you have difficulty expressing the meaning of the word in English you may write
the translation of the word in another language)
b) Write a sentence in English that uses the new word in a meaningful context If you have
difficulty composing a sentence using the word check with an English learnersrsquo dictionary for a
good sample sentence
3 Create a card for each word that was new to you in the vocabulary exercise for Reading 1
4 Until you are comfortable using the words on your word cards review the cards every day changing
the order in which you review them Saying the words out loud as you review them may help you
remember them
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec
Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec
Length
General activities
1
2
3
Number of people who attend
Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec
Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
1
2
3
Activities
1
2
3
4
5
Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada
Size
Materials used in construction
Location
Number of guest rooms
Other rooms in the hotel
1
2
3
4
Advice
Comprehension Check
1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425
14 Chapter 1
2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion
Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo
Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions
a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________
b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-
Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition
through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois
strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________
c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more
daring __________
d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot
hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________
e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________
3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before
You Die For whom do you think the book was written
4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not
Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands
Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic
1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places
to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of
the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada
2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know
about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article
compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525
Chapter 1
The Queen Charlotte Islands
British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada
[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte
Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means
Islands of the People) are the homeland of the
Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British
Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands
mostly on Graham Island and about half of
these people are Haida e islands are also home
to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life
Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off
the coast of British Columbia this group of 150
islands has developed its own species of flora1 and
fauna2
From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live
on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen
Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million
nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos
population of peregrine falcons and salmon
[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000
years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred
objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European
diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council
of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the
second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island
is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is
beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed
in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages
which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the
park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours
offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the
Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from
the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for
meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625
16 Chapter 1
1 flora plants that grow in a place
2 fauna animals that live in a place
3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing
Vocabulary in Context
In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described
flora all the plants that grow in a place
fauna all the animals that live in a place
1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or
fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you
make the best guesses that you can
Flora Fauna
black bears
cedar
deer mice
hemlock
peregrine falcons
salmon
seabirds
spruce
2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about the
Queen Charlotte Islands
Indigenous name
Information about people on the Islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
1
2
3
Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people
on the islands
e Haida people before contact with
Europeans
e Haida people after contact with
Europeans
Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii
Haanas National Park Reserve
and Haida Heritage Site
Description of the park
Visiting the park
1
2
Comprehension Check
Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825
18 Chapter 1
Writing
Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences
Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple
compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will
learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and
editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences
The Simple Sentence
1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb
that work together to create a complete thought
Example e woman spoke
Subject Verb
2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object
so that the thought is complete
Examples e carnival has many highlights
Subject Verb Object
Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve
Subject Verb Object
and Haida Heritage Site
3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information
Examples No logging is allowed in the park
Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase
e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world
Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase
A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A
prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence
4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence
below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object
Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people
Subject Subject Verb Object
for more than 10 000 years
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences
Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences
1 At a traditional ceremony __________
2 During the annual film festival __________
3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________
4 On the prairie __________
5 We had a cool drink __________
6 Alongside the river __________
7 Enormous trees have survived __________
8 At the appropriate time __________
Exercise 2
Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI
beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing
1 In the most unique city in Canada __________
2 CBC held a contest __________
3 Many Canadians voted __________
4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________
5 Canadians chose many different places __________
6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________
7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________
8 Was a resident of the settlement __________
9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________
10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________
Exercise 3
Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to
make sure that they are complete
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025
20 Chapter 1
The Compound Sentence
A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been
joined by a coordinating conjunction
e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences
for nor or soand but yet
Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions
and additional information
Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island
but contrasting information
Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island
or alternative ideas
Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island
so cause and effect
Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast
Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent
clauses
e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences
About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
people are Haida
eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence
Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural
Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan
2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery
3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba
5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls
6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the
Cabot Trail
7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map
Exercise 2
Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this
chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence
to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225
22 Chapter 1
Writing to Communicate
Writing Task
Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words
1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could
be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place
2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor
place a community or an event in a particular place
Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it
is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never
been to the place that you are describing
Organization Choosing Information
As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need
to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about
the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are
unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first
paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs
1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec
Basic Information Location of the event
Length of the event
General activities at the event
Number of people who attend the event
Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
Activities
Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size
Materials used in the construction
Location
Other details
Ice Hotel
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325
Chapter 1
2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands
Basic Information Indigenous name
Information about people on the islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans
After contact with Europeans
Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park
Visiting the park
Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place
you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us
these lists as an outline for your composition
Descriptive Writing Creating an Image
When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e
organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important
to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place
seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place
In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and
the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One
of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive
feeling but also create a mood
In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns
high spirit
lively crowd welcoming environment
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425
24 Chapter 1
In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to
create a very different mood
distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands
incredibly rich diversity of biological life
masterful carvers
magnificent villages unique history
huge cedar spruce and hemlock
abandoned villages
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four
descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers
Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that
convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers
choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting
information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers
Revising and Editing
Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and
want to know Consider the following questions
bull Could your reader find the place on a map
bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader
bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place
Step 2Focus on your word choice
bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey
Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete
bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb
bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1025
10 Chapter 1
[2] Watching over the carnival is
Bonhomme the festivalrsquos mascot1
Bonhomme is a large snowman
he is newly constructed each
year According to local stories
Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice
Palace an enormous castle built ofsnow and ice that is located near
the Quebec government buildings
e carnival has many highlights
ese include the snow sculpture
competition at Place Loto-
Quebec tobogganing down icy
slides for adults and children the
dogsledding competition through
the streets of Vieux-Quebec2 and
the annual Snow Bath in whichstrong Quebecois strip down to
their bathing suits in front of
a lively crowd and dive into a
snowdrift e annual canoe race
in which participants race across
the icy St Lawrence River is even
more daring
[3] While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for
visitors therersquos no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada
a 30 000-square-foot hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow Located on the
shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an
exhibition space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly
constructed each year from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice Admittedly it is
not the most comfortable choice of hotel for everyone but at least make time to visit
and perhaps have something cool to drinkmdashin an ice glass of coursemdashat the Ice Bar
1 mascot a symbol of an event
2 Vieux-Quebec the old part of Quebec City
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1020ndash1021) New York Workman Publishing
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1125
Chapter 1
Vocabulary in Context
Most of the vocabulary that you will study as you work your way through this textbook appears on the
academic word list of frequently used words It is important for you to learn these words since they will
appear in various readings and lectures in academic studies
Choose the best meaning for each of the italicized words in the sentences below
1 e carnival owes some of its high spirit to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of
brandy vodka sherry and port) although there are many events during the winter carnival that are
organized for families (paragraph 1)
a) customary
b) new
c) magnificent
2 Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year (paragraph 2)
a) is made b) is connected
c) is designed
3 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of
snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)
a) ldquopersonrdquo who was born in
b) ldquopersonrdquo who works at
c) ldquopersonrdquo who lives at
4 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of
snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)a) popular
b) very large
c) medium-sized
5 e carnival has many highlights (paragraph 2)
a) best parts
b) longest parts
c) strangest parts
6 ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-Quebec tobogganing down icy slides
for adults and children the dogsledding competition through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and theannual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively
crowd and dive into a snowdrift (paragraph 2)
a) weekly
b) monthly
c) yearly
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1225
12 Chapter 1
7 While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot hotel
constructed each winter of ice and snow (paragraph 3)
a) suitable
b) fun
c) active
8 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition
space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)
a) surrounded by
b) situated on
c) south of
9 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition
space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each yearfrom 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)
a) gymnasium
b) library
c) display
Vocabulary Learning Strategy Using Word Cards
Intentionally focusing your attention on words that are used frequently in English can help you increase
the size of your vocabulary Using word cards is one way to focus your attention on vocabulary items in
English
1 Take a small card (approximately 5 cm x 4 cm) and write one of the new vocabulary words from
Reading 1 on one side of the card
2 On the other side of the card do the following
a) Draw a picture that represents the meaning of the word or write the meaning of the word in
English (If you have difficulty expressing the meaning of the word in English you may write
the translation of the word in another language)
b) Write a sentence in English that uses the new word in a meaningful context If you have
difficulty composing a sentence using the word check with an English learnersrsquo dictionary for a
good sample sentence
3 Create a card for each word that was new to you in the vocabulary exercise for Reading 1
4 Until you are comfortable using the words on your word cards review the cards every day changing
the order in which you review them Saying the words out loud as you review them may help you
remember them
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec
Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec
Length
General activities
1
2
3
Number of people who attend
Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec
Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
1
2
3
Activities
1
2
3
4
5
Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada
Size
Materials used in construction
Location
Number of guest rooms
Other rooms in the hotel
1
2
3
4
Advice
Comprehension Check
1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425
14 Chapter 1
2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion
Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo
Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions
a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________
b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-
Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition
through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois
strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________
c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more
daring __________
d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot
hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________
e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________
3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before
You Die For whom do you think the book was written
4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not
Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands
Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic
1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places
to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of
the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada
2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know
about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article
compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525
Chapter 1
The Queen Charlotte Islands
British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada
[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte
Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means
Islands of the People) are the homeland of the
Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British
Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands
mostly on Graham Island and about half of
these people are Haida e islands are also home
to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life
Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off
the coast of British Columbia this group of 150
islands has developed its own species of flora1 and
fauna2
From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live
on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen
Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million
nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos
population of peregrine falcons and salmon
[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000
years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred
objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European
diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council
of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the
second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island
is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is
beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed
in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages
which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the
park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours
offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the
Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from
the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for
meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625
16 Chapter 1
1 flora plants that grow in a place
2 fauna animals that live in a place
3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing
Vocabulary in Context
In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described
flora all the plants that grow in a place
fauna all the animals that live in a place
1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or
fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you
make the best guesses that you can
Flora Fauna
black bears
cedar
deer mice
hemlock
peregrine falcons
salmon
seabirds
spruce
2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about the
Queen Charlotte Islands
Indigenous name
Information about people on the Islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
1
2
3
Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people
on the islands
e Haida people before contact with
Europeans
e Haida people after contact with
Europeans
Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii
Haanas National Park Reserve
and Haida Heritage Site
Description of the park
Visiting the park
1
2
Comprehension Check
Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825
18 Chapter 1
Writing
Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences
Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple
compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will
learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and
editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences
The Simple Sentence
1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb
that work together to create a complete thought
Example e woman spoke
Subject Verb
2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object
so that the thought is complete
Examples e carnival has many highlights
Subject Verb Object
Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve
Subject Verb Object
and Haida Heritage Site
3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information
Examples No logging is allowed in the park
Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase
e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world
Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase
A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A
prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence
4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence
below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object
Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people
Subject Subject Verb Object
for more than 10 000 years
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences
Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences
1 At a traditional ceremony __________
2 During the annual film festival __________
3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________
4 On the prairie __________
5 We had a cool drink __________
6 Alongside the river __________
7 Enormous trees have survived __________
8 At the appropriate time __________
Exercise 2
Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI
beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing
1 In the most unique city in Canada __________
2 CBC held a contest __________
3 Many Canadians voted __________
4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________
5 Canadians chose many different places __________
6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________
7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________
8 Was a resident of the settlement __________
9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________
10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________
Exercise 3
Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to
make sure that they are complete
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025
20 Chapter 1
The Compound Sentence
A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been
joined by a coordinating conjunction
e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences
for nor or soand but yet
Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions
and additional information
Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island
but contrasting information
Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island
or alternative ideas
Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island
so cause and effect
Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast
Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent
clauses
e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences
About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
people are Haida
eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence
Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural
Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan
2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery
3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba
5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls
6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the
Cabot Trail
7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map
Exercise 2
Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this
chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence
to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225
22 Chapter 1
Writing to Communicate
Writing Task
Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words
1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could
be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place
2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor
place a community or an event in a particular place
Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it
is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never
been to the place that you are describing
Organization Choosing Information
As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need
to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about
the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are
unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first
paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs
1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec
Basic Information Location of the event
Length of the event
General activities at the event
Number of people who attend the event
Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
Activities
Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size
Materials used in the construction
Location
Other details
Ice Hotel
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325
Chapter 1
2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands
Basic Information Indigenous name
Information about people on the islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans
After contact with Europeans
Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park
Visiting the park
Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place
you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us
these lists as an outline for your composition
Descriptive Writing Creating an Image
When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e
organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important
to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place
seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place
In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and
the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One
of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive
feeling but also create a mood
In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns
high spirit
lively crowd welcoming environment
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425
24 Chapter 1
In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to
create a very different mood
distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands
incredibly rich diversity of biological life
masterful carvers
magnificent villages unique history
huge cedar spruce and hemlock
abandoned villages
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four
descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers
Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that
convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers
choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting
information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers
Revising and Editing
Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and
want to know Consider the following questions
bull Could your reader find the place on a map
bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader
bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place
Step 2Focus on your word choice
bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey
Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete
bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb
bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1125
Chapter 1
Vocabulary in Context
Most of the vocabulary that you will study as you work your way through this textbook appears on the
academic word list of frequently used words It is important for you to learn these words since they will
appear in various readings and lectures in academic studies
Choose the best meaning for each of the italicized words in the sentences below
1 e carnival owes some of its high spirit to a traditional drink called the Caribou (a mixture of
brandy vodka sherry and port) although there are many events during the winter carnival that are
organized for families (paragraph 1)
a) customary
b) new
c) magnificent
2 Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year (paragraph 2)
a) is made b) is connected
c) is designed
3 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of
snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)
a) ldquopersonrdquo who was born in
b) ldquopersonrdquo who works at
c) ldquopersonrdquo who lives at
4 According to local stories Bonhomme is a resident of the Ice Palace an enormous castle built of
snow and ice that is located near the Quebec government buildings (paragraph 2)a) popular
b) very large
c) medium-sized
5 e carnival has many highlights (paragraph 2)
a) best parts
b) longest parts
c) strangest parts
6 ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-Quebec tobogganing down icy slides
for adults and children the dogsledding competition through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and theannual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively
crowd and dive into a snowdrift (paragraph 2)
a) weekly
b) monthly
c) yearly
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1225
12 Chapter 1
7 While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot hotel
constructed each winter of ice and snow (paragraph 3)
a) suitable
b) fun
c) active
8 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition
space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)
a) surrounded by
b) situated on
c) south of
9 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition
space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each yearfrom 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)
a) gymnasium
b) library
c) display
Vocabulary Learning Strategy Using Word Cards
Intentionally focusing your attention on words that are used frequently in English can help you increase
the size of your vocabulary Using word cards is one way to focus your attention on vocabulary items in
English
1 Take a small card (approximately 5 cm x 4 cm) and write one of the new vocabulary words from
Reading 1 on one side of the card
2 On the other side of the card do the following
a) Draw a picture that represents the meaning of the word or write the meaning of the word in
English (If you have difficulty expressing the meaning of the word in English you may write
the translation of the word in another language)
b) Write a sentence in English that uses the new word in a meaningful context If you have
difficulty composing a sentence using the word check with an English learnersrsquo dictionary for a
good sample sentence
3 Create a card for each word that was new to you in the vocabulary exercise for Reading 1
4 Until you are comfortable using the words on your word cards review the cards every day changing
the order in which you review them Saying the words out loud as you review them may help you
remember them
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec
Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec
Length
General activities
1
2
3
Number of people who attend
Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec
Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
1
2
3
Activities
1
2
3
4
5
Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada
Size
Materials used in construction
Location
Number of guest rooms
Other rooms in the hotel
1
2
3
4
Advice
Comprehension Check
1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425
14 Chapter 1
2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion
Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo
Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions
a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________
b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-
Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition
through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois
strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________
c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more
daring __________
d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot
hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________
e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________
3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before
You Die For whom do you think the book was written
4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not
Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands
Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic
1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places
to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of
the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada
2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know
about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article
compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525
Chapter 1
The Queen Charlotte Islands
British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada
[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte
Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means
Islands of the People) are the homeland of the
Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British
Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands
mostly on Graham Island and about half of
these people are Haida e islands are also home
to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life
Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off
the coast of British Columbia this group of 150
islands has developed its own species of flora1 and
fauna2
From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live
on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen
Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million
nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos
population of peregrine falcons and salmon
[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000
years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred
objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European
diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council
of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the
second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island
is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is
beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed
in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages
which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the
park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours
offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the
Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from
the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for
meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625
16 Chapter 1
1 flora plants that grow in a place
2 fauna animals that live in a place
3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing
Vocabulary in Context
In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described
flora all the plants that grow in a place
fauna all the animals that live in a place
1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or
fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you
make the best guesses that you can
Flora Fauna
black bears
cedar
deer mice
hemlock
peregrine falcons
salmon
seabirds
spruce
2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about the
Queen Charlotte Islands
Indigenous name
Information about people on the Islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
1
2
3
Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people
on the islands
e Haida people before contact with
Europeans
e Haida people after contact with
Europeans
Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii
Haanas National Park Reserve
and Haida Heritage Site
Description of the park
Visiting the park
1
2
Comprehension Check
Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825
18 Chapter 1
Writing
Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences
Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple
compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will
learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and
editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences
The Simple Sentence
1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb
that work together to create a complete thought
Example e woman spoke
Subject Verb
2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object
so that the thought is complete
Examples e carnival has many highlights
Subject Verb Object
Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve
Subject Verb Object
and Haida Heritage Site
3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information
Examples No logging is allowed in the park
Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase
e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world
Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase
A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A
prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence
4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence
below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object
Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people
Subject Subject Verb Object
for more than 10 000 years
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences
Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences
1 At a traditional ceremony __________
2 During the annual film festival __________
3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________
4 On the prairie __________
5 We had a cool drink __________
6 Alongside the river __________
7 Enormous trees have survived __________
8 At the appropriate time __________
Exercise 2
Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI
beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing
1 In the most unique city in Canada __________
2 CBC held a contest __________
3 Many Canadians voted __________
4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________
5 Canadians chose many different places __________
6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________
7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________
8 Was a resident of the settlement __________
9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________
10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________
Exercise 3
Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to
make sure that they are complete
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025
20 Chapter 1
The Compound Sentence
A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been
joined by a coordinating conjunction
e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences
for nor or soand but yet
Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions
and additional information
Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island
but contrasting information
Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island
or alternative ideas
Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island
so cause and effect
Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast
Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent
clauses
e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences
About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
people are Haida
eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence
Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural
Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan
2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery
3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba
5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls
6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the
Cabot Trail
7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map
Exercise 2
Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this
chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence
to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225
22 Chapter 1
Writing to Communicate
Writing Task
Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words
1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could
be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place
2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor
place a community or an event in a particular place
Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it
is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never
been to the place that you are describing
Organization Choosing Information
As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need
to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about
the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are
unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first
paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs
1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec
Basic Information Location of the event
Length of the event
General activities at the event
Number of people who attend the event
Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
Activities
Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size
Materials used in the construction
Location
Other details
Ice Hotel
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325
Chapter 1
2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands
Basic Information Indigenous name
Information about people on the islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans
After contact with Europeans
Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park
Visiting the park
Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place
you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us
these lists as an outline for your composition
Descriptive Writing Creating an Image
When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e
organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important
to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place
seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place
In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and
the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One
of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive
feeling but also create a mood
In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns
high spirit
lively crowd welcoming environment
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425
24 Chapter 1
In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to
create a very different mood
distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands
incredibly rich diversity of biological life
masterful carvers
magnificent villages unique history
huge cedar spruce and hemlock
abandoned villages
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four
descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers
Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that
convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers
choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting
information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers
Revising and Editing
Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and
want to know Consider the following questions
bull Could your reader find the place on a map
bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader
bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place
Step 2Focus on your word choice
bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey
Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete
bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb
bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1225
12 Chapter 1
7 While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot hotel
constructed each winter of ice and snow (paragraph 3)
a) suitable
b) fun
c) active
8 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition
space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)
a) surrounded by
b) situated on
c) south of
9 Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibition
space a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each yearfrom 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice (paragraph 3)
a) gymnasium
b) library
c) display
Vocabulary Learning Strategy Using Word Cards
Intentionally focusing your attention on words that are used frequently in English can help you increase
the size of your vocabulary Using word cards is one way to focus your attention on vocabulary items in
English
1 Take a small card (approximately 5 cm x 4 cm) and write one of the new vocabulary words from
Reading 1 on one side of the card
2 On the other side of the card do the following
a) Draw a picture that represents the meaning of the word or write the meaning of the word in
English (If you have difficulty expressing the meaning of the word in English you may write
the translation of the word in another language)
b) Write a sentence in English that uses the new word in a meaningful context If you have
difficulty composing a sentence using the word check with an English learnersrsquo dictionary for a
good sample sentence
3 Create a card for each word that was new to you in the vocabulary exercise for Reading 1
4 Until you are comfortable using the words on your word cards review the cards every day changing
the order in which you review them Saying the words out loud as you review them may help you
remember them
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec
Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec
Length
General activities
1
2
3
Number of people who attend
Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec
Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
1
2
3
Activities
1
2
3
4
5
Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada
Size
Materials used in construction
Location
Number of guest rooms
Other rooms in the hotel
1
2
3
4
Advice
Comprehension Check
1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425
14 Chapter 1
2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion
Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo
Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions
a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________
b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-
Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition
through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois
strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________
c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more
daring __________
d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot
hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________
e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________
3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before
You Die For whom do you think the book was written
4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not
Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands
Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic
1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places
to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of
the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada
2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know
about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article
compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525
Chapter 1
The Queen Charlotte Islands
British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada
[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte
Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means
Islands of the People) are the homeland of the
Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British
Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands
mostly on Graham Island and about half of
these people are Haida e islands are also home
to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life
Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off
the coast of British Columbia this group of 150
islands has developed its own species of flora1 and
fauna2
From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live
on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen
Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million
nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos
population of peregrine falcons and salmon
[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000
years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred
objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European
diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council
of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the
second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island
is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is
beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed
in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages
which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the
park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours
offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the
Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from
the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for
meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625
16 Chapter 1
1 flora plants that grow in a place
2 fauna animals that live in a place
3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing
Vocabulary in Context
In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described
flora all the plants that grow in a place
fauna all the animals that live in a place
1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or
fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you
make the best guesses that you can
Flora Fauna
black bears
cedar
deer mice
hemlock
peregrine falcons
salmon
seabirds
spruce
2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about the
Queen Charlotte Islands
Indigenous name
Information about people on the Islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
1
2
3
Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people
on the islands
e Haida people before contact with
Europeans
e Haida people after contact with
Europeans
Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii
Haanas National Park Reserve
and Haida Heritage Site
Description of the park
Visiting the park
1
2
Comprehension Check
Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825
18 Chapter 1
Writing
Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences
Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple
compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will
learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and
editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences
The Simple Sentence
1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb
that work together to create a complete thought
Example e woman spoke
Subject Verb
2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object
so that the thought is complete
Examples e carnival has many highlights
Subject Verb Object
Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve
Subject Verb Object
and Haida Heritage Site
3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information
Examples No logging is allowed in the park
Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase
e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world
Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase
A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A
prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence
4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence
below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object
Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people
Subject Subject Verb Object
for more than 10 000 years
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences
Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences
1 At a traditional ceremony __________
2 During the annual film festival __________
3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________
4 On the prairie __________
5 We had a cool drink __________
6 Alongside the river __________
7 Enormous trees have survived __________
8 At the appropriate time __________
Exercise 2
Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI
beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing
1 In the most unique city in Canada __________
2 CBC held a contest __________
3 Many Canadians voted __________
4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________
5 Canadians chose many different places __________
6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________
7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________
8 Was a resident of the settlement __________
9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________
10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________
Exercise 3
Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to
make sure that they are complete
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025
20 Chapter 1
The Compound Sentence
A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been
joined by a coordinating conjunction
e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences
for nor or soand but yet
Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions
and additional information
Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island
but contrasting information
Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island
or alternative ideas
Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island
so cause and effect
Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast
Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent
clauses
e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences
About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
people are Haida
eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence
Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural
Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan
2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery
3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba
5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls
6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the
Cabot Trail
7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map
Exercise 2
Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this
chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence
to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225
22 Chapter 1
Writing to Communicate
Writing Task
Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words
1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could
be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place
2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor
place a community or an event in a particular place
Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it
is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never
been to the place that you are describing
Organization Choosing Information
As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need
to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about
the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are
unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first
paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs
1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec
Basic Information Location of the event
Length of the event
General activities at the event
Number of people who attend the event
Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
Activities
Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size
Materials used in the construction
Location
Other details
Ice Hotel
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325
Chapter 1
2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands
Basic Information Indigenous name
Information about people on the islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans
After contact with Europeans
Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park
Visiting the park
Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place
you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us
these lists as an outline for your composition
Descriptive Writing Creating an Image
When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e
organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important
to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place
seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place
In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and
the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One
of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive
feeling but also create a mood
In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns
high spirit
lively crowd welcoming environment
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425
24 Chapter 1
In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to
create a very different mood
distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands
incredibly rich diversity of biological life
masterful carvers
magnificent villages unique history
huge cedar spruce and hemlock
abandoned villages
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four
descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers
Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that
convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers
choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting
information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers
Revising and Editing
Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and
want to know Consider the following questions
bull Could your reader find the place on a map
bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader
bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place
Step 2Focus on your word choice
bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey
Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete
bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb
bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1325
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about theCarnaval de Queacutebec
Location of the Carnaval de Queacutebec
Length
General activities
1
2
3
Number of people who attend
Paragraph 2 Specific aspects of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec
Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
1
2
3
Activities
1
2
3
4
5
Paragraph 3 Description of the Ice HotelQuebec-Canada
Size
Materials used in construction
Location
Number of guest rooms
Other rooms in the hotel
1
2
3
4
Advice
Comprehension Check
1 Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425
14 Chapter 1
2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion
Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo
Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions
a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________
b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-
Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition
through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois
strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________
c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more
daring __________
d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot
hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________
e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________
3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before
You Die For whom do you think the book was written
4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not
Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands
Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic
1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places
to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of
the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada
2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know
about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article
compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525
Chapter 1
The Queen Charlotte Islands
British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada
[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte
Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means
Islands of the People) are the homeland of the
Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British
Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands
mostly on Graham Island and about half of
these people are Haida e islands are also home
to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life
Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off
the coast of British Columbia this group of 150
islands has developed its own species of flora1 and
fauna2
From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live
on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen
Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million
nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos
population of peregrine falcons and salmon
[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000
years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred
objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European
diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council
of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the
second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island
is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is
beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed
in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages
which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the
park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours
offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the
Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from
the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for
meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625
16 Chapter 1
1 flora plants that grow in a place
2 fauna animals that live in a place
3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing
Vocabulary in Context
In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described
flora all the plants that grow in a place
fauna all the animals that live in a place
1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or
fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you
make the best guesses that you can
Flora Fauna
black bears
cedar
deer mice
hemlock
peregrine falcons
salmon
seabirds
spruce
2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about the
Queen Charlotte Islands
Indigenous name
Information about people on the Islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
1
2
3
Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people
on the islands
e Haida people before contact with
Europeans
e Haida people after contact with
Europeans
Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii
Haanas National Park Reserve
and Haida Heritage Site
Description of the park
Visiting the park
1
2
Comprehension Check
Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825
18 Chapter 1
Writing
Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences
Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple
compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will
learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and
editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences
The Simple Sentence
1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb
that work together to create a complete thought
Example e woman spoke
Subject Verb
2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object
so that the thought is complete
Examples e carnival has many highlights
Subject Verb Object
Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve
Subject Verb Object
and Haida Heritage Site
3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information
Examples No logging is allowed in the park
Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase
e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world
Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase
A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A
prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence
4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence
below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object
Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people
Subject Subject Verb Object
for more than 10 000 years
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences
Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences
1 At a traditional ceremony __________
2 During the annual film festival __________
3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________
4 On the prairie __________
5 We had a cool drink __________
6 Alongside the river __________
7 Enormous trees have survived __________
8 At the appropriate time __________
Exercise 2
Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI
beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing
1 In the most unique city in Canada __________
2 CBC held a contest __________
3 Many Canadians voted __________
4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________
5 Canadians chose many different places __________
6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________
7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________
8 Was a resident of the settlement __________
9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________
10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________
Exercise 3
Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to
make sure that they are complete
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025
20 Chapter 1
The Compound Sentence
A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been
joined by a coordinating conjunction
e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences
for nor or soand but yet
Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions
and additional information
Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island
but contrasting information
Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island
or alternative ideas
Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island
so cause and effect
Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast
Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent
clauses
e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences
About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
people are Haida
eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence
Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural
Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan
2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery
3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba
5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls
6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the
Cabot Trail
7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map
Exercise 2
Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this
chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence
to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225
22 Chapter 1
Writing to Communicate
Writing Task
Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words
1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could
be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place
2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor
place a community or an event in a particular place
Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it
is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never
been to the place that you are describing
Organization Choosing Information
As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need
to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about
the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are
unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first
paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs
1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec
Basic Information Location of the event
Length of the event
General activities at the event
Number of people who attend the event
Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
Activities
Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size
Materials used in the construction
Location
Other details
Ice Hotel
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325
Chapter 1
2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands
Basic Information Indigenous name
Information about people on the islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans
After contact with Europeans
Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park
Visiting the park
Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place
you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us
these lists as an outline for your composition
Descriptive Writing Creating an Image
When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e
organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important
to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place
seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place
In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and
the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One
of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive
feeling but also create a mood
In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns
high spirit
lively crowd welcoming environment
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425
24 Chapter 1
In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to
create a very different mood
distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands
incredibly rich diversity of biological life
masterful carvers
magnificent villages unique history
huge cedar spruce and hemlock
abandoned villages
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four
descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers
Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that
convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers
choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting
information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers
Revising and Editing
Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and
want to know Consider the following questions
bull Could your reader find the place on a map
bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader
bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place
Step 2Focus on your word choice
bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey
Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete
bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb
bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1425
14 Chapter 1
2 e author of this article uses a combination of facts and opinions in her description of the
Carnaval de Queacutebec Are the following statements from the article statements of fact or opinion
Mark the statements that are facts with an ldquoFrdquo and the statements that are opinions with an ldquoOrdquo
Underline the parts of the statements that contain opinions
a) Bonhomme is a large snowman he is newly constructed each year __________
b) e carnival has many highlights ese include the snow sculpture competition at Place Loto-
Quebec tobogganing down icy slides for adults and children the dogsledding competition
through the streets of Vieux-Quebec and the annual Snow Bath in which strong Quebecois
strip down to their bathing suits in front of a lively crowd and dive into a snowdrift ________
c) e annual canoe race in which participants race across the icy St Lawrence River is even more
daring __________
d) While all the hotels in Vieux-Quebec create a very welcoming environment for visitors therersquos
no more appropriate place to stay than the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada a 30 000-square-foot
hotel constructed each winter of ice and snow __________
e) Located on the shores of Lake St Joseph 30 minutes west of Quebec City the hotel offers more
than 30 guest rooms and suites and includes a wedding hall two art galleries and an exhibitionspace a spa with hot tubs and a sauna plus a bar and nightclubmdashall newly constructed each year
from 12 000 tons of snow and 400 tons of ice __________
3 is short article was adapted from a book called 1000 Places to See in the USA and Canada before
You Die For whom do you think the book was written
4 After reading this article are you interested in visiting the carnival Why or why not
Reading 2mdashThe Queen Charlotte Islands
Pre-reading Thinking about the Topic
1 e reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo is another descriptive text adapted from 1000 Places
to See in the USA and Canada before You Die Before reading the text search online for a map of
the islands en label the Queen Charlotte Islands also known as Haida Gwaii on your map ofCanada
2 e author compares the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands What do you know
about the Galapagos Islands Where are they located Why might the author of this article
compare the Queen Charlotte Islands to the Galapagos Islands
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525
Chapter 1
The Queen Charlotte Islands
British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada
[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte
Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means
Islands of the People) are the homeland of the
Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British
Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands
mostly on Graham Island and about half of
these people are Haida e islands are also home
to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life
Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off
the coast of British Columbia this group of 150
islands has developed its own species of flora1 and
fauna2
From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live
on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen
Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million
nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos
population of peregrine falcons and salmon
[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000
years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred
objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European
diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council
of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the
second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island
is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is
beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed
in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages
which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the
park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours
offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the
Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from
the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for
meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625
16 Chapter 1
1 flora plants that grow in a place
2 fauna animals that live in a place
3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing
Vocabulary in Context
In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described
flora all the plants that grow in a place
fauna all the animals that live in a place
1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or
fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you
make the best guesses that you can
Flora Fauna
black bears
cedar
deer mice
hemlock
peregrine falcons
salmon
seabirds
spruce
2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about the
Queen Charlotte Islands
Indigenous name
Information about people on the Islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
1
2
3
Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people
on the islands
e Haida people before contact with
Europeans
e Haida people after contact with
Europeans
Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii
Haanas National Park Reserve
and Haida Heritage Site
Description of the park
Visiting the park
1
2
Comprehension Check
Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825
18 Chapter 1
Writing
Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences
Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple
compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will
learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and
editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences
The Simple Sentence
1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb
that work together to create a complete thought
Example e woman spoke
Subject Verb
2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object
so that the thought is complete
Examples e carnival has many highlights
Subject Verb Object
Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve
Subject Verb Object
and Haida Heritage Site
3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information
Examples No logging is allowed in the park
Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase
e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world
Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase
A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A
prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence
4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence
below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object
Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people
Subject Subject Verb Object
for more than 10 000 years
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences
Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences
1 At a traditional ceremony __________
2 During the annual film festival __________
3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________
4 On the prairie __________
5 We had a cool drink __________
6 Alongside the river __________
7 Enormous trees have survived __________
8 At the appropriate time __________
Exercise 2
Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI
beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing
1 In the most unique city in Canada __________
2 CBC held a contest __________
3 Many Canadians voted __________
4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________
5 Canadians chose many different places __________
6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________
7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________
8 Was a resident of the settlement __________
9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________
10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________
Exercise 3
Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to
make sure that they are complete
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025
20 Chapter 1
The Compound Sentence
A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been
joined by a coordinating conjunction
e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences
for nor or soand but yet
Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions
and additional information
Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island
but contrasting information
Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island
or alternative ideas
Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island
so cause and effect
Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast
Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent
clauses
e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences
About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
people are Haida
eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence
Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural
Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan
2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery
3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba
5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls
6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the
Cabot Trail
7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map
Exercise 2
Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this
chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence
to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225
22 Chapter 1
Writing to Communicate
Writing Task
Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words
1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could
be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place
2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor
place a community or an event in a particular place
Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it
is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never
been to the place that you are describing
Organization Choosing Information
As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need
to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about
the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are
unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first
paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs
1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec
Basic Information Location of the event
Length of the event
General activities at the event
Number of people who attend the event
Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
Activities
Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size
Materials used in the construction
Location
Other details
Ice Hotel
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325
Chapter 1
2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands
Basic Information Indigenous name
Information about people on the islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans
After contact with Europeans
Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park
Visiting the park
Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place
you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us
these lists as an outline for your composition
Descriptive Writing Creating an Image
When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e
organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important
to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place
seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place
In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and
the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One
of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive
feeling but also create a mood
In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns
high spirit
lively crowd welcoming environment
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425
24 Chapter 1
In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to
create a very different mood
distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands
incredibly rich diversity of biological life
masterful carvers
magnificent villages unique history
huge cedar spruce and hemlock
abandoned villages
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four
descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers
Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that
convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers
choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting
information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers
Revising and Editing
Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and
want to know Consider the following questions
bull Could your reader find the place on a map
bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader
bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place
Step 2Focus on your word choice
bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey
Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete
bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb
bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1525
Chapter 1
The Queen Charlotte Islands
British Columbia The Galapagos of Canada
[1] e distant and little-known Queen Charlotte
Islands (also called Haida Gwaii which means
Islands of the People) are the homeland of the
Haida a nation of Indigenous people in British
Columbia About 6000 people live on the islands
mostly on Graham Island and about half of
these people are Haida e islands are also home
to an incredibly rich diversity of biological life
Situated 80 nautical miles [150 kilometres] off
the coast of British Columbia this group of 150
islands has developed its own species of flora1 and
fauna2
From black bears to deer mice many of theanimals are different from their ldquocousinsrdquo who live
on the mainland of British Columbia e Queen
Charlottes are home to an estimated 15 million
nesting seabirds a quarter of British Columbiarsquos
population of peregrine falcons and salmon
[2] e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people for more than 10 000
years e Haida were masterful carvers of totem poles3 masks and other sacred
objects After contact with European explorers the Haida were decimated by European
diseases eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
[3] Today to protect the islandsrsquo unique history the Canadian government and the Council
of the Haida Nation has preserved the southern part of Moresby Island which is the
second largest of the Queen Charlotte Islands Now the southern part of the island
is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve and Haida Heritage Site e park is
beautiful and is dominated by huge cedar spruce and hemlock No logging is allowed
in the park e most interesting areas of the park however are the old Haida villages
which can be reached only by boat For most people just about the only way to visit the
park is by arranging to join a guide on a boating excursion For example Butterfly Tours
offers eight-day kayaking tours which visit abandoned villages and the islandrsquos outercoast Tourists could also consider another of Butterfly Toursrsquo boating excursions to the
Islands on an 80-foot [25-metre] motorized sailboat Tourists take kayaks out from
the sailboat to the islands during the days and return to the sailboat in the evenings for
meals and the comfort of private heated rooms for the night
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625
16 Chapter 1
1 flora plants that grow in a place
2 fauna animals that live in a place
3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing
Vocabulary in Context
In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described
flora all the plants that grow in a place
fauna all the animals that live in a place
1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or
fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you
make the best guesses that you can
Flora Fauna
black bears
cedar
deer mice
hemlock
peregrine falcons
salmon
seabirds
spruce
2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about the
Queen Charlotte Islands
Indigenous name
Information about people on the Islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
1
2
3
Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people
on the islands
e Haida people before contact with
Europeans
e Haida people after contact with
Europeans
Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii
Haanas National Park Reserve
and Haida Heritage Site
Description of the park
Visiting the park
1
2
Comprehension Check
Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825
18 Chapter 1
Writing
Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences
Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple
compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will
learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and
editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences
The Simple Sentence
1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb
that work together to create a complete thought
Example e woman spoke
Subject Verb
2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object
so that the thought is complete
Examples e carnival has many highlights
Subject Verb Object
Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve
Subject Verb Object
and Haida Heritage Site
3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information
Examples No logging is allowed in the park
Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase
e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world
Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase
A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A
prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence
4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence
below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object
Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people
Subject Subject Verb Object
for more than 10 000 years
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences
Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences
1 At a traditional ceremony __________
2 During the annual film festival __________
3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________
4 On the prairie __________
5 We had a cool drink __________
6 Alongside the river __________
7 Enormous trees have survived __________
8 At the appropriate time __________
Exercise 2
Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI
beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing
1 In the most unique city in Canada __________
2 CBC held a contest __________
3 Many Canadians voted __________
4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________
5 Canadians chose many different places __________
6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________
7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________
8 Was a resident of the settlement __________
9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________
10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________
Exercise 3
Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to
make sure that they are complete
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025
20 Chapter 1
The Compound Sentence
A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been
joined by a coordinating conjunction
e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences
for nor or soand but yet
Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions
and additional information
Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island
but contrasting information
Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island
or alternative ideas
Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island
so cause and effect
Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast
Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent
clauses
e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences
About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
people are Haida
eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence
Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural
Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan
2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery
3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba
5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls
6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the
Cabot Trail
7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map
Exercise 2
Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this
chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence
to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225
22 Chapter 1
Writing to Communicate
Writing Task
Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words
1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could
be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place
2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor
place a community or an event in a particular place
Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it
is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never
been to the place that you are describing
Organization Choosing Information
As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need
to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about
the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are
unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first
paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs
1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec
Basic Information Location of the event
Length of the event
General activities at the event
Number of people who attend the event
Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
Activities
Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size
Materials used in the construction
Location
Other details
Ice Hotel
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325
Chapter 1
2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands
Basic Information Indigenous name
Information about people on the islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans
After contact with Europeans
Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park
Visiting the park
Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place
you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us
these lists as an outline for your composition
Descriptive Writing Creating an Image
When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e
organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important
to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place
seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place
In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and
the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One
of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive
feeling but also create a mood
In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns
high spirit
lively crowd welcoming environment
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425
24 Chapter 1
In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to
create a very different mood
distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands
incredibly rich diversity of biological life
masterful carvers
magnificent villages unique history
huge cedar spruce and hemlock
abandoned villages
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four
descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers
Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that
convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers
choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting
information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers
Revising and Editing
Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and
want to know Consider the following questions
bull Could your reader find the place on a map
bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader
bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place
Step 2Focus on your word choice
bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey
Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete
bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb
bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1625
16 Chapter 1
1 flora plants that grow in a place
2 fauna animals that live in a place
3 totem poles tall wooden poles with symbols and pictures carved into them
Adapted from
Schultz P (2007) 1000 places to see in the USA and Canada before you die (pp 1046ndash1047) New York Workman Publishing
Vocabulary in Context
In Reading 2 the flora and fauna of the Queen Charlotte Islands are described
flora all the plants that grow in a place
fauna all the animals that live in a place
1 Put a check in the column to indicate whether the items in the list below are examples of flora or
fauna Do not look up the words in your dictionary Use the context of the reading to help you
make the best guesses that you can
Flora Fauna
black bears
cedar
deer mice
hemlock
peregrine falcons
salmon
seabirds
spruce
2 What clues in the reading helped you guess whether each word in the chart above is flora or fauna
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about the
Queen Charlotte Islands
Indigenous name
Information about people on the Islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
1
2
3
Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people
on the islands
e Haida people before contact with
Europeans
e Haida people after contact with
Europeans
Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii
Haanas National Park Reserve
and Haida Heritage Site
Description of the park
Visiting the park
1
2
Comprehension Check
Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825
18 Chapter 1
Writing
Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences
Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple
compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will
learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and
editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences
The Simple Sentence
1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb
that work together to create a complete thought
Example e woman spoke
Subject Verb
2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object
so that the thought is complete
Examples e carnival has many highlights
Subject Verb Object
Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve
Subject Verb Object
and Haida Heritage Site
3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information
Examples No logging is allowed in the park
Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase
e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world
Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase
A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A
prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence
4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence
below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object
Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people
Subject Subject Verb Object
for more than 10 000 years
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences
Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences
1 At a traditional ceremony __________
2 During the annual film festival __________
3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________
4 On the prairie __________
5 We had a cool drink __________
6 Alongside the river __________
7 Enormous trees have survived __________
8 At the appropriate time __________
Exercise 2
Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI
beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing
1 In the most unique city in Canada __________
2 CBC held a contest __________
3 Many Canadians voted __________
4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________
5 Canadians chose many different places __________
6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________
7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________
8 Was a resident of the settlement __________
9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________
10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________
Exercise 3
Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to
make sure that they are complete
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025
20 Chapter 1
The Compound Sentence
A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been
joined by a coordinating conjunction
e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences
for nor or soand but yet
Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions
and additional information
Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island
but contrasting information
Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island
or alternative ideas
Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island
so cause and effect
Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast
Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent
clauses
e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences
About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
people are Haida
eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence
Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural
Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan
2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery
3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba
5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls
6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the
Cabot Trail
7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map
Exercise 2
Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this
chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence
to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225
22 Chapter 1
Writing to Communicate
Writing Task
Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words
1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could
be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place
2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor
place a community or an event in a particular place
Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it
is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never
been to the place that you are describing
Organization Choosing Information
As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need
to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about
the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are
unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first
paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs
1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec
Basic Information Location of the event
Length of the event
General activities at the event
Number of people who attend the event
Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
Activities
Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size
Materials used in the construction
Location
Other details
Ice Hotel
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325
Chapter 1
2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands
Basic Information Indigenous name
Information about people on the islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans
After contact with Europeans
Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park
Visiting the park
Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place
you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us
these lists as an outline for your composition
Descriptive Writing Creating an Image
When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e
organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important
to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place
seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place
In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and
the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One
of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive
feeling but also create a mood
In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns
high spirit
lively crowd welcoming environment
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425
24 Chapter 1
In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to
create a very different mood
distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands
incredibly rich diversity of biological life
masterful carvers
magnificent villages unique history
huge cedar spruce and hemlock
abandoned villages
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four
descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers
Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that
convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers
choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting
information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers
Revising and Editing
Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and
want to know Consider the following questions
bull Could your reader find the place on a map
bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader
bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place
Step 2Focus on your word choice
bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey
Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete
bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb
bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1725
Chapter 1
Paragraph 1 Basic information about the
Queen Charlotte Islands
Indigenous name
Information about people on the Islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
1
2
3
Paragraph 2 History of the Haida people
on the islands
e Haida people before contact with
Europeans
e Haida people after contact with
Europeans
Paragraph 3 Protecting the islands Gwaii
Haanas National Park Reserve
and Haida Heritage Site
Description of the park
Visiting the park
1
2
Comprehension Check
Fill in the blanks in the chart below with information from the reading
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825
18 Chapter 1
Writing
Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences
Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple
compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will
learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and
editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences
The Simple Sentence
1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb
that work together to create a complete thought
Example e woman spoke
Subject Verb
2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object
so that the thought is complete
Examples e carnival has many highlights
Subject Verb Object
Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve
Subject Verb Object
and Haida Heritage Site
3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information
Examples No logging is allowed in the park
Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase
e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world
Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase
A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A
prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence
4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence
below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object
Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people
Subject Subject Verb Object
for more than 10 000 years
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences
Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences
1 At a traditional ceremony __________
2 During the annual film festival __________
3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________
4 On the prairie __________
5 We had a cool drink __________
6 Alongside the river __________
7 Enormous trees have survived __________
8 At the appropriate time __________
Exercise 2
Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI
beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing
1 In the most unique city in Canada __________
2 CBC held a contest __________
3 Many Canadians voted __________
4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________
5 Canadians chose many different places __________
6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________
7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________
8 Was a resident of the settlement __________
9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________
10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________
Exercise 3
Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to
make sure that they are complete
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025
20 Chapter 1
The Compound Sentence
A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been
joined by a coordinating conjunction
e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences
for nor or soand but yet
Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions
and additional information
Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island
but contrasting information
Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island
or alternative ideas
Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island
so cause and effect
Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast
Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent
clauses
e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences
About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
people are Haida
eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence
Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural
Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan
2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery
3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba
5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls
6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the
Cabot Trail
7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map
Exercise 2
Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this
chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence
to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225
22 Chapter 1
Writing to Communicate
Writing Task
Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words
1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could
be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place
2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor
place a community or an event in a particular place
Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it
is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never
been to the place that you are describing
Organization Choosing Information
As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need
to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about
the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are
unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first
paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs
1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec
Basic Information Location of the event
Length of the event
General activities at the event
Number of people who attend the event
Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
Activities
Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size
Materials used in the construction
Location
Other details
Ice Hotel
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325
Chapter 1
2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands
Basic Information Indigenous name
Information about people on the islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans
After contact with Europeans
Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park
Visiting the park
Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place
you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us
these lists as an outline for your composition
Descriptive Writing Creating an Image
When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e
organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important
to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place
seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place
In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and
the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One
of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive
feeling but also create a mood
In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns
high spirit
lively crowd welcoming environment
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425
24 Chapter 1
In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to
create a very different mood
distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands
incredibly rich diversity of biological life
masterful carvers
magnificent villages unique history
huge cedar spruce and hemlock
abandoned villages
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four
descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers
Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that
convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers
choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting
information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers
Revising and Editing
Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and
want to know Consider the following questions
bull Could your reader find the place on a map
bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader
bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place
Step 2Focus on your word choice
bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey
Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete
bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb
bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1825
18 Chapter 1
Writing
Grammar Focus on Simple and Compound Sentences
Many students learning English as an additional language are overwhelmed by what can seem like anendless variety of sentences in English In fact in English there are four basic sentence types simple
compound complex and compound-complex sentences As you work through this textbook you will
learn about and practise using these four sentence types In this chapter you will practise writing and
editing the first two types simple sentences and compound sentences
The Simple Sentence
1 A simple sentence is an independent clause An independent clause contains a subject and a verb
that work together to create a complete thought
Example e woman spoke
Subject Verb
2 A simple sentence can be longer with a subject a verb and an object Some verbs require an object
so that the thought is complete
Examples e carnival has many highlights
Subject Verb Object
Now the southern part of the island is called Gwaii Haanas National Park Reserve
Subject Verb Object
and Haida Heritage Site
3 A simple sentence can also include prepositional phrases that add information
Examples No logging is allowed in the park
Subject Verb Prepositional Phrase
e Bay of Fundy has the highest tides in the world
Subject Verb Object Prepositional Phrase
A prepositional phrase contains a preposition and a noun but does not contain a verb A
prepositional phrase is not a complete sentence
4 A simple sentence can contain a compound subject and a compound verb Notice that the sentence
below contains two subjects that both work with the verb and the object
Example e islandsrsquo forests and bays have been home to the Haida people
Subject Subject Verb Object
for more than 10 000 years
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences
Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences
1 At a traditional ceremony __________
2 During the annual film festival __________
3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________
4 On the prairie __________
5 We had a cool drink __________
6 Alongside the river __________
7 Enormous trees have survived __________
8 At the appropriate time __________
Exercise 2
Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI
beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing
1 In the most unique city in Canada __________
2 CBC held a contest __________
3 Many Canadians voted __________
4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________
5 Canadians chose many different places __________
6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________
7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________
8 Was a resident of the settlement __________
9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________
10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________
Exercise 3
Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to
make sure that they are complete
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025
20 Chapter 1
The Compound Sentence
A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been
joined by a coordinating conjunction
e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences
for nor or soand but yet
Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions
and additional information
Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island
but contrasting information
Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island
or alternative ideas
Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island
so cause and effect
Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast
Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent
clauses
e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences
About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
people are Haida
eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence
Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural
Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan
2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery
3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba
5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls
6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the
Cabot Trail
7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map
Exercise 2
Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this
chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence
to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225
22 Chapter 1
Writing to Communicate
Writing Task
Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words
1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could
be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place
2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor
place a community or an event in a particular place
Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it
is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never
been to the place that you are describing
Organization Choosing Information
As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need
to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about
the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are
unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first
paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs
1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec
Basic Information Location of the event
Length of the event
General activities at the event
Number of people who attend the event
Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
Activities
Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size
Materials used in the construction
Location
Other details
Ice Hotel
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325
Chapter 1
2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands
Basic Information Indigenous name
Information about people on the islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans
After contact with Europeans
Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park
Visiting the park
Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place
you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us
these lists as an outline for your composition
Descriptive Writing Creating an Image
When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e
organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important
to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place
seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place
In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and
the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One
of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive
feeling but also create a mood
In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns
high spirit
lively crowd welcoming environment
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425
24 Chapter 1
In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to
create a very different mood
distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands
incredibly rich diversity of biological life
masterful carvers
magnificent villages unique history
huge cedar spruce and hemlock
abandoned villages
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four
descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers
Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that
convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers
choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting
information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers
Revising and Editing
Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and
want to know Consider the following questions
bull Could your reader find the place on a map
bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader
bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place
Step 2Focus on your word choice
bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey
Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete
bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb
bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 1925
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Tell which of the following are prepositional phrases and which of the following are simple sentences
Write ldquoPPrdquo beside the prepositional phrases and ldquoSSrdquo beside the simple sentences
1 At a traditional ceremony __________
2 During the annual film festival __________
3 e builders quickly constructed the magnificent structure __________
4 On the prairie __________
5 We had a cool drink __________
6 Alongside the river __________
7 Enormous trees have survived __________
8 At the appropriate time __________
Exercise 2
Decide which of the following are complete sentences Write ldquoCrdquo beside those that are complete and ldquoI
beside those that are incomplete For those that are not sentences write what is missing
1 In the most unique city in Canada __________
2 CBC held a contest __________
3 Many Canadians voted __________
4 Many Canadians voted for a ldquoWonder of Canadardquo __________
5 Canadians chose many different places __________
6 e oldest European settlement in North America __________
7 e oldest European settlement in North America is in Newfoundland __________
8 Was a resident of the settlement __________
9 Off the coast of Newfoundland in Eastern Canada __________
10 Grows along the eastern shore of Labrador __________
Exercise 3
Write five simple sentences about where you live in Canada Ask a classmate to check your sentences to
make sure that they are complete
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025
20 Chapter 1
The Compound Sentence
A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been
joined by a coordinating conjunction
e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences
for nor or soand but yet
Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions
and additional information
Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island
but contrasting information
Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island
or alternative ideas
Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island
so cause and effect
Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast
Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent
clauses
e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences
About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
people are Haida
eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence
Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural
Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan
2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery
3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba
5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls
6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the
Cabot Trail
7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map
Exercise 2
Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this
chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence
to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225
22 Chapter 1
Writing to Communicate
Writing Task
Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words
1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could
be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place
2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor
place a community or an event in a particular place
Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it
is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never
been to the place that you are describing
Organization Choosing Information
As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need
to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about
the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are
unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first
paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs
1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec
Basic Information Location of the event
Length of the event
General activities at the event
Number of people who attend the event
Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
Activities
Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size
Materials used in the construction
Location
Other details
Ice Hotel
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325
Chapter 1
2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands
Basic Information Indigenous name
Information about people on the islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans
After contact with Europeans
Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park
Visiting the park
Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place
you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us
these lists as an outline for your composition
Descriptive Writing Creating an Image
When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e
organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important
to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place
seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place
In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and
the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One
of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive
feeling but also create a mood
In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns
high spirit
lively crowd welcoming environment
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425
24 Chapter 1
In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to
create a very different mood
distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands
incredibly rich diversity of biological life
masterful carvers
magnificent villages unique history
huge cedar spruce and hemlock
abandoned villages
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four
descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers
Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that
convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers
choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting
information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers
Revising and Editing
Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and
want to know Consider the following questions
bull Could your reader find the place on a map
bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader
bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place
Step 2Focus on your word choice
bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey
Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete
bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb
bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2025
20 Chapter 1
The Compound Sentence
A compound sentence consists of two simple sentences (two independent clauses) that have been
joined by a coordinating conjunction
e following coordinating conjunctions can be used to join two simple sentences
for nor or soand but yet
Relationship of Clauses Joined by the Common Coordinating Conjunctions
and additional information
Example He visited Newfoundland and she visited Prince Edward Island
but contrasting information
Example He wanted to go to Newfoundland but she wanted to go to Prince Edward Island
or alternative ideas
Example We could go to Newfoundland or we could go to Prince Edward Island
so cause and effect
Example I wanted to see the Atlantic Ocean so I went to the East Coast
Note A comma is often used before the coordinating conjunction to separate the two independent
clauses
e following examples from the readings in Chapter 1 are compound sentences
About 6000 people live on the islands mostly on Graham Island and about half of these
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
people are Haida
eir magnificent villages were deserted and the forest took over
Simple Sentence Conjunction Simple Sentence
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence
Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural
Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan
2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery
3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba
5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls
6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the
Cabot Trail
7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map
Exercise 2
Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this
chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence
to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225
22 Chapter 1
Writing to Communicate
Writing Task
Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words
1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could
be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place
2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor
place a community or an event in a particular place
Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it
is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never
been to the place that you are describing
Organization Choosing Information
As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need
to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about
the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are
unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first
paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs
1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec
Basic Information Location of the event
Length of the event
General activities at the event
Number of people who attend the event
Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
Activities
Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size
Materials used in the construction
Location
Other details
Ice Hotel
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325
Chapter 1
2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands
Basic Information Indigenous name
Information about people on the islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans
After contact with Europeans
Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park
Visiting the park
Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place
you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us
these lists as an outline for your composition
Descriptive Writing Creating an Image
When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e
organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important
to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place
seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place
In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and
the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One
of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive
feeling but also create a mood
In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns
high spirit
lively crowd welcoming environment
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425
24 Chapter 1
In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to
create a very different mood
distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands
incredibly rich diversity of biological life
masterful carvers
magnificent villages unique history
huge cedar spruce and hemlock
abandoned villages
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four
descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers
Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that
convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers
choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting
information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers
Revising and Editing
Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and
want to know Consider the following questions
bull Could your reader find the place on a map
bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader
bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place
Step 2Focus on your word choice
bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey
Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete
bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb
bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2125
Chapter 1
Exercise 1
Combine each pair of simple sentences (independent clauses) to form one compound sentence
Note Some words should be changed or deleted to make the new sentences natural
Example Two simple sentences In some countries costs are stable In some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
Combined sentence In some countries costs are stable but in some countries costs tend to rise
quickly
1 Travelling can be expensive It is important to have a good plan
2 I wanted to visit the new exhibit at the museum My friend wanted to visit the art gallery
3 I thought the bus would cost a loonie My partner knew that it would cost a toonie4 Poutine is a popular food in Quebec Whalesrsquo tails are popular in Manitoba
5 I thought I would visit the beach Another choice was the waterfalls
6 During her trip she went hiking in the bush During her trip she rode her bike along parts of the
Cabot Trail
7 It is easy to get lost in big cities It is important to have a good map
Exercise 2
Look back to the fact and opinion statements about a Canadian wonder that you wrote earlier in this
chapter Using the same information rewrite the sentences as compound sentences Edit your sentence
to make sure that you have two independent clauses in each
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225
22 Chapter 1
Writing to Communicate
Writing Task
Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words
1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could
be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place
2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor
place a community or an event in a particular place
Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it
is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never
been to the place that you are describing
Organization Choosing Information
As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need
to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about
the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are
unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first
paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs
1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec
Basic Information Location of the event
Length of the event
General activities at the event
Number of people who attend the event
Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
Activities
Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size
Materials used in the construction
Location
Other details
Ice Hotel
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325
Chapter 1
2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands
Basic Information Indigenous name
Information about people on the islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans
After contact with Europeans
Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park
Visiting the park
Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place
you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us
these lists as an outline for your composition
Descriptive Writing Creating an Image
When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e
organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important
to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place
seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place
In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and
the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One
of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive
feeling but also create a mood
In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns
high spirit
lively crowd welcoming environment
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425
24 Chapter 1
In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to
create a very different mood
distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands
incredibly rich diversity of biological life
masterful carvers
magnificent villages unique history
huge cedar spruce and hemlock
abandoned villages
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four
descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers
Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that
convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers
choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting
information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers
Revising and Editing
Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and
want to know Consider the following questions
bull Could your reader find the place on a map
bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader
bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place
Step 2Focus on your word choice
bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey
Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete
bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb
bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2225
22 Chapter 1
Writing to Communicate
Writing Task
Choose one of the following topics and write a response of approximately 150 to 200 words
1 Describe a place anywhere in the world that you have visited that was a highlight for you It could
be a building an outdoor space a community or an event in a particular place
2 Describe a place that you have researched and might like to visit It could be a building an outdoor
place a community or an event in a particular place
Whichever topic you choose describe the place so that your reader will have a clear picture of what it
is like and will want to go there Imagine that you are describing this place for a reader who has never
been to the place that you are describing
Organization Choosing Information
As you decide on what to include in your response think about what information your reader will need
to get a clear picture of the place you are describing and its significance e writer of the articles about
the Carnaval de Queacutebec and the Queen Charlotte Islands describces these places for readers who are
unfamiliar with them Notice that she starts both of her descriptions with basic information in her first
paragraph and then provides more detail in the following paragraphs
1 Description of an event e Carnaval de Queacutebec
Basic Information Location of the event
Length of the event
General activities at the event
Number of people who attend the event
Aspects of the Carnaval de Queacutebec Mascot name
Description of the Ice Palace
Activities
Description of the Ice Hotel Quebec-Canada Size
Materials used in the construction
Location
Other details
Ice Hotel
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325
Chapter 1
2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands
Basic Information Indigenous name
Information about people on the islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans
After contact with Europeans
Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park
Visiting the park
Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place
you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us
these lists as an outline for your composition
Descriptive Writing Creating an Image
When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e
organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important
to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place
seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place
In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and
the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One
of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive
feeling but also create a mood
In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns
high spirit
lively crowd welcoming environment
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425
24 Chapter 1
In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to
create a very different mood
distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands
incredibly rich diversity of biological life
masterful carvers
magnificent villages unique history
huge cedar spruce and hemlock
abandoned villages
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four
descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers
Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that
convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers
choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting
information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers
Revising and Editing
Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and
want to know Consider the following questions
bull Could your reader find the place on a map
bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader
bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place
Step 2Focus on your word choice
bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey
Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete
bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb
bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2325
Chapter 1
2 Description of a physical place e Queen Charlotte Islands
Basic Information Indigenous name
Information about people on the islands
Location
Number of islands
Types of wildlife
History of the Haida People on the Islands Before contact with Europeans
After contact with Europeans
Protecting the Islands oday Description of the park
Visiting the park
Before you write your text list the basic information that your reader needs to know about the place
you are describing en list the additional information that you want your reader to know You may us
these lists as an outline for your composition
Descriptive Writing Creating an Image
When describing writers express their thoughts in ways that create images for their readers e
organization of the ideas is important to create clear visual images the use of vocabulary is important
to create images that appeal to the senses rough the words that are chosen writers can make a place
seem attractive to the reader Writers can also create a mood that the reader will associate with a place
In the two readings in this chapter the writer tries to build clear images of the Carnaval de Queacutebec and
the Queen Charlotte Islands She also tries to build images that will appeal to the readerrsquos senses One
of the ways that the writer accomplishes this is by choosing adjectives that not only convey a positive
feeling but also create a mood
In the reading ldquoCarnaval de Queacutebecrdquo the writer uses adjectives with several nouns
high spirit
lively crowd welcoming environment
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425
24 Chapter 1
In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to
create a very different mood
distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands
incredibly rich diversity of biological life
masterful carvers
magnificent villages unique history
huge cedar spruce and hemlock
abandoned villages
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four
descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers
Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that
convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers
choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting
information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers
Revising and Editing
Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and
want to know Consider the following questions
bull Could your reader find the place on a map
bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader
bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place
Step 2Focus on your word choice
bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey
Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete
bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb
bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2425
24 Chapter 1
In the reading ldquoe Queen Charlotte Islandsrdquo the writer also uses adjectives but she uses them to
create a very different mood
distant and little-known Queen Charlotte Islands
incredibly rich diversity of biological life
masterful carvers
magnificent villages unique history
huge cedar spruce and hemlock
abandoned villages
What feelings or moods do these adjectives create
What kind of person might be attracted to this place
What feeling or mood do you want to create about the place that you are describing Find four
descriptive adjectives that you could use to help you create this mood for your readers
Note When you write your description it is your choice whether or not to include adjectives that
convey a feeling or a mood Some writers choose to use adjectives to create a mood other writers
choose not to use adjectives to create a mood ese writers create a mood through selecting
information about the place or event that will appeal to their readers
Revising and Editing
Step 1Read through your draft checking that it includes the basic information that a reader would need and
want to know Consider the following questions
bull Could your reader find the place on a map
bull Have you described the most significant aspects of the place for your reader
bull Have you included details about the place that might make your reader want to visit this place
Step 2Focus on your word choice
bull Have you used adjectives in your description If yes what mood do they convey
Step 3Check your composition to make sure that each sentence is complete
bull Does each sentence have a subject and a verb
bull Have you used a variety of sentences (both simple and compound)
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future
7242019 Creating Meaning Upper Intermediate Chapter 1
httpslidepdfcomreaderfullcreating-meaning-upper-intermediate-chapter-1 2525
Step 4Give your composition to a classmate and have your classmate answer the following questions based o
your composition
bull What is the name of the place
bull Where is the place
bull What are three significant aspects of the place
bull Do you have any questions about the place that were not answered in the composition
bull What information could the writer add to the description that would make you want to visit this
place
Step 5Revise your composition based on your classmatersquos feedback
Reflect on Your Learningin This Chapter
Taking the time to think about what you have learned can help you carry that learning forward and
use it in new situations It is by using vocabulary reading strategies critical thinking skills and writing
strategies in new situations that you learn them more deeply At the end of each chapter in this text
you will be asked to think about what you have learned so that you are ready to carry that learning
forward and use it in new situations
Respond to the following questions
1 What did you learn
2 What do you think was important
3 How can you use what you learned in the future